HEAT User Guide

HEAT User Guide
Version 9.5.1
10/10
Notices
Copyright  2010 FrontRange Solutions USA Inc. All Rights Reserved.

The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine Copyright © 1999 Wintertree Software Inc.
The HEAT Web-based Call Logging product may contain the following and other open source components:
• GWT-Ext, Copyright (c) 2007-2008 GWT-Ext LLC. which is licensed under the GNU LESSER
GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE v3.0;
• Hibernate, Copyright 2006, Red Hat Middleware, LLC. which is licensed under the GNU LESSER
GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE v3.0;
• iText-2.1.3- Copyright (c) 1999-2008 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares. All Rights Reserved. which
is licensed under the GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE v2.1;
• javassist Copyright (c) 1999-2003 Shigeru Chiba. All Rights Reserved. which is licensed under the
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE v2.1;
• antlr 2.7.6 Copyright (c) 2003-2006, Terence Parr. All rights reserved.
• asm Copyright (c) 2000-2005 INRIA, France Telecom. All rights reserved.
• dom4j-1.6.1 Copyright (c) 2001-2005 MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
• jaxen-1.1.1 Copyright (c) 2003-2006 The Werken Company. All Rights Reserved.
• Slf4j-1.5 Copyright (c) 2004-2008 QOS.ch. All rights reserved.
• Joda Time Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Stephen Colebourne
• c3p0 © 2006 Machinery For Change, Inc.
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS RELATED USER DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE APPLICABLE END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA), A
COPY OF WHICH IS FOUND IN THE USER DOCUMENTATION FOLDER INCLUDED IN THE
SOFTWARE. YOU MUST AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE EULA IN ORDER TO
USE THIS SOFTWARE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE EULA,
RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE WITHIN THIRTY (30) DAYS OF PURCHASE IN ITS UNOPENED
PACKAGE TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED IT FOR A REFUND (MINUS ANY
RESTOCKING FEE).
WARNING: The software described in this manual and its related user documentation are protected by
copyright law. In no event, shall any part of the related user documentation be copied, reproduced,
distributed, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language, without the express
written permission of FrontRange Solutions USA Inc.
FrontRange Trademark Information
The following are trademarks of FrontRange Solutions USA Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States
and/or other countries: FrontRange Solutions®, FrontRange™, GoldMine®, GoldSync®, GoldMine®
Answer Wizard™, GoldMine® Management Intelligence™, GoldMine® Manager’s Console™,
iGoldMine™, HEAT®, HEAT® Service & Support™, HEAT® PowerDesk™, iHEAT™, HEAT® Self
Service™, HEAT® Manager’s Console™, HEAT® Answer Wizard™, HEAT® Quick Start Wizard™,
InfoCenter®, Automated Processes™, First Level Support®, enteo®, DeviceWall®, Centennial
Discovery®, Discovery Dashboard®, MicroAudit®, SAM™ and other FrontRange products and brands.
Other Trademark Information
Microsoft products, brands and trademarks, including Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows
Vista, SQL Server, and Internet Explorer, are the property of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Other products and brands are the trademarks of their respective owners or companies.
Contact FrontRange Solutions USA Inc. at our Web site: www.frontrange.com
(Jan 2010)
ii
Table of
Contents
Welcome to Call Logging
Getting Started
Launch and Log On to Call Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Upgrade Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Navigate Call Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
HEAT Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Call Logging Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Call Status Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Tabbed Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
InfoCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Call Record Tab Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Call Record Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Attachments Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
How Call Logging Works
Key Terms and Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Visualizing the Call Logging Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How Call Logging Works with Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Call Records
Working with Call Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Open Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Create New Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Save Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Close Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Reopen Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Update Call Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Delete Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Lock and Unlock Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table of Contents
Put Call Records On Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Create Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Working with a Subset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Working with the Call Log Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Working with the Detail Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Working with the Assignment Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Working with the Journal Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Track Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Working with the Activity Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Call Transfer Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Call Groups
Create Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Simple Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Boolean Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Working with Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Open Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Edit Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Delete Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Restore Saved Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Save Call Group after Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Refresh Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Remove Calls from Call Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Create Toolbar Buttons for Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Hot Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Working with My Hot List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Working with Hot Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Create Hot Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Add Call Records to Hot Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Remove Calls from Hot Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Delete Hot Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Customer Records
Profile Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Contacts Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Configuration Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Call History Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Customer Groups
Create Customer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Simple Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Boolean Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Working with Customer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Open Customer Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Edit Customer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
iv HEAT
Table of Contents
Delete Customer Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Create Toolbar Buttons for Customer Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Attachments
Record Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Global Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Searching
Quick Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Simple Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Search Using the Find Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Search by Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Search by Call ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Boolean Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Search Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HEAT Plus Knowledge (HPK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
First Level Support (FLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
InfoCenter
HEATBoard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Navigating the HEATBoard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Create HEATBoard Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Designate a Lead Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Link Calls to HEATBoard Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Call Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Call Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Customer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Call Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
AutoTasks
Working with AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Create AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Edit AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Copy AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Delete AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Run AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Work with AutoTask Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Create AutoTasks Toolbar Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Import AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Export AutoTasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
AutoTask Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Create Activity Log Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Create an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
User Guide v
Table of Contents
Create Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Create Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Create Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Create Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Create Customer Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Create Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Create Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Display Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Execute External Service Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Goto Call(Ticket). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
HEATBoard Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
If Field is Empty Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
If Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Jump to a Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Print Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Run an AutoTask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Run a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Send a Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Send a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Update Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Update Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Update Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Update Customer Login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Update Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Web Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Write a File to Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Inserting HEAT Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Insert Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Insert Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Insert Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Insert Temporary Filename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Insert All Assignments/Insert All Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Insert Blank Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Insert New Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Insert Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Customizing Call Logging
Set User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
SupportMail Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
MAPI/Lotus Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
GroupWise Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
POP/SMTP Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Location Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
vi HEAT
Table of Contents
Path Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Sound Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Prompt Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
HEATBoard Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Call Map Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Sales/Marketing Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Sales Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Customize/Create Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Create, Edit, Delete Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Modify Default Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Move, Resize, Rename Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Reset Default Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Set Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Table Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Adding Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
On the Fly Table Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Smart Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Asset Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Reporting
Working with Report Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Add Report Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Run Report Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Copy Report Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Edit Report Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Delete Report Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Set Default Report Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Add, Rename, Delete Report Shortcut Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Create Toolbar Buttons for Report Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Running Crystal Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
SupportMail
Setting Up SupportMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Navigating SupportMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Creating SupportMail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Creating New Folders in SupportMail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Sending an E‐mail through SupportMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Broadcast Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Printing
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Print Call Records in Form View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Print Call Records in Grid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Export Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Print by Call Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
User Guide vii

Table of Contents
MobileHEAT
Set Up the MobileHEAT Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Transfer Call Records to New Mobile Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Synchronizing Call Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Resources
Additional Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Contact Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Index
viii HEAT
1
Call Logging is the principal module for your HEAT system, providing all the tools you need to effectively
track and resolve your organization’s important issues. Features include an internal mail program, an
InfoCenter for posting important customer and company information, AutoTasks for executing actions
automatically, Call Groups for managing issues, extensive reporting features to help you keep abreast of
your organization’s performance, and much more.
With Call Logging you can:
• Create multiple Assignments for one call, enabling the most qualified personnel to address and
resolve specific facets of the issue in question.
• Create a Journal entry each time there is contact with the employee or customer so that you
have a complete record of the tasks performed on behalf of that employee or customer.
• Define Call Groups and Customer Groups using Boolean or Simple Searches to create specific
collections of issues for your review. For example, you could define a Call Group of all open
issues with a Call Type of Asset Issue.
• Keep apprised of issues that affect the organization using the InfoCenter HEATBoard.
• Create AutoTasks (a series of steps linked together to accomplish an action) and assign the
AutoTasks to a toolbar button for quick access.
• .Customize settings in Report Shortcuts so the reports you run most often are saved and ready
for use at a moment's notice.

2 HEAT
2
Getting Started
The following topics describe how to:
• Launch and Log On to Call Logging.
• Use Shortcut Keys in the various HEAT modules.
• Navigate Call Logging (which includes information about menus, toolbars, and tabs).
Getting Started
Launch and Log On to Call Logging

To Launch Call Logging:
1 Select Start>Programs>HEAT>Call Logging.
2 The HEAT Service & Support Data Source dialog box opens. Specify the data source to use.
3 Select Automatically use this Data Source in the future if you want to always use the
designated data source.
Note: If you make this selection, the HEAT Service & Support Data Source
dialog box no longer opens when launching Call Logging. You can still change
the data source on the Location tab under Edit>User Preferences; refer to
"Location Preferences" for details.
4 Click OK. The Call Logging log on window opens.
5 Type your User ID and Password. Click OK. The Call Logging main window opens, displaying
the Call Log form, with the HEAT Dashboard dialog box open (refer to "HEAT Dashboard").
Note: After your initial log on, the Restore Saved Groups dialog box may open
upon subsequent logons, asking if you want to Restore saved groups from
previous session. If you answer Yes, the last active Call Group displays.
Upgrade Notification
If your company has upgraded to the latest version of HEAT, you may see an upgrade required message
when you log into Call Logging:
• The HEAT Version Upgrade Required dialog box opens, containing instructions from the HEAT
administrator.
• Read the instructions, then click the Upgrade Link at the bottom of the dialog box to begin the
upgrade.
• HEAT Call Logging closes and the upgrade begins, eventually displaying the installation wizard ‐
refer to the "End‐User Workstations" installation procedure in the HEAT Service & Support
Installation Guide for details.
Shortcut Keys
HEAT provides access to common functions and commands with keyboard shortcut keys.
Core HEAT
Function Key
Copy Ctrl+C
Cut Ctrl+X
Delete character to the left Backspace
Delete character to the right Delete
Move back one field Shift+Tab
4 HEAT
Shortcut Keys
Function Key
Move cursor one word to the left Ctrl+left arrow
Move cursor one word to the right Ctrl+right arrow
Move cursor to beginning of text Ctrl+Home
field
Move cursor to beginning of the line Home
Move cursor to end of text field Ctrl+End
Move cursor to end of the line End
Move cursor to next field Tab
Move cursor within a field left arrow and right
arrow
Paste Ctrl+V
Scroll text in a memo field up arrow and down
arrow
Undo Ctrl+Z
Call Logging
Function Key
Alarms Shift+F11
Assignment, Go to Alt+3
Assignment, Acknowledge Shift+F2
Assignment, New Ctrl+A
Assignment, Resolve Ctrl+Shift+F2
Call, First Shift+F7
Call, Last Shift+F8
Call, Next F8
Call, Previous F7
Call Group, Close Ctrl+F4
Call Group, Open Existing Ctrl+O
Call ID, Go to Ctrl+G
Call Log, Go to Alt+1
Call Map, Go to Ctrl+Alt+M
Call on Hold, Place Ctrl+H
Call Record Browse, Display Ctrl+B
User Guide 5
Getting Started
Function Key
Call Ticket Report, Run Ctrl+Alt+R
Clear a Date or Time Field F2
Counter Field, Decrement ‐ (numpad)
Counter Field, Increment + (numpad)
Crystal Decisions Crystal Reports Ctrl+D
Customer Types, Change Ctrl+T
Detail Alt+2
Display Calendar in Date Field F4
Fill in System Date/Time F3
First Level Support (FLS) Ctrl+F
HEATBoard Current Call Information Ctrl+Alt+C
HEATBoard, Go to Ctrl+Alt+B
Help F1
Journal Alt+4
Moves between Call Groups Ctrl+Tab
My Hot List, Add Call Ctrl+M
New Call Ctrl+N
New Journal Ctrl+J
Next Assignment/ Journal Ctrl+Page Down
Previous Assignment/ Journal Ctrl+Page Up
Print Active Call Group Ctrl+Shift+P
Print Call Ticket Ctrl+P
Profile F5
Quick Close F10
Refresh Call Record Ctrl+F5
Refreshes Active Call Group Ctrl+E
Run Crystal Report Ctrl+Shift+D
Run/Edit Report Shortcut Ctrl+Alt+D
Save Ctrl+S
Search, Perform Ctrl+Shift+S
Spell Check Shift+F9
6 HEAT
Shortcut Keys
Function Key
Subset, Autosize F12
SupportMail F11
Toggles between upper and lower F6
panes
Un/Lock Call Record Ctrl+L
Validations F9
SupportMail
Function Key
Attached Call, Go to Ctrl+A
Broadcasts Ctrl+B
Forward Mail Ctrl+F
Message, new Ctrl+M
Move Ctrl+V
Refresh Messages Ctrl+E
Reply to Sender Ctrl+R
Alert Monitor
Function Key
Define a Call Group Alert Ctrl+G
Define a System Message Alert Ctrl+M
New Alert Definition Ctrl+N
Open a Call Group Alert Definition Ctrl+O
Poll Now F5
Save Ctrl+S
Start Polling F2
Toggles between At and Away from F7
Desk
Toggles between upper and lower F6
panes
View Alert Summary F8
View Journal Entries Ctrl+J
User Guide 7
Getting Started
First Level Support (FLS)

Function Key
Add Child Ctrl+A
Collapse branch ‐ (numpad)
Edit F2
Exit Alt+F4
Expand branch * (numpad)
Expand one level + (numpad)
Find F3
New Ctrl+N
Open Ctrl+O
Print Ctrl+P
Save Ctrl+S
Navigate Call Logging

To navigate through Call Logging, you should become familiar with the:
• HEAT Dashboard ‐ Enables you to view at a glance My Groups, HEAT Broadcasts, My Active
Incidents list, and call/incident metrics.
• Call Logging Main Window ‐ Contains navigation components such as the Menu bar, InfoCenter,
and a number of toolbars and controls.
• Forms and Form Tabs ‐ These elements are explained in "Call Records".
8 HEAT
HEAT Dashboard
The HEAT Dashboard dialog box opens over the Call Log form when you first log on to HEAT, and can
be subsequently accessed via the View menu or by pressing Ctrl+F12. The Dashboard provides a one‐
stop location for common views and metrics:
• My Groups section ‐ Enables users to add personal call group icons, allowing for quick access to
commonly used groups.
Note: When creating or editing a Personal Call Group, the Display on HEAT
Dashboard check box must be selected in order for the group to be visible on
the Dashboard. Refer to the online help topic "Create Call Groups" for more
information.
• HEAT Broadcasts section ‐ Enables users to view and maintain HEAT broadcasts.
• Displays My Active Incidents list and three commonly used metrics: Active Incidents by
Priority, Active Incidents by Call Type, and Total Calls by Month. The list and metrics are
interactive, allowing users to open the specific record or group of records by clicking the
corresponding record or area of the metric. The columns in the My Active Incidents list can be
sorted by clicking the column header.
Note: The display of the Active Incidents by Priority metric requires the Priority
field (which is not a HEAT system field). If the HEAT system does not have a
Priority field, users will receive an error when opening the HEAT Dashboard.
• Use the Refresh button to refresh the Dashboard display, especially receiving a new incident
assignment or after creating a new Personal Call Group to display in the My Groups section.
User Guide 9
Getting Started
To Modify the Dashboard Display
Any of the views and metrics can be removed from display on the Dashboard, so you can display
on the Dashboard only the information you need to see:
1 Click the Settings down arrow at the bottom left of the Dashboard.
2 Deselect the check box next to the item you want to remove from display.
To Disable the Dashboard
To prevent the dashboard from opening when you log on to Call Logging:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences.
2 Click the Display tab.
3 Deselect the Show Dashboard at Startup check box.
4 Click OK. Note that you can still reopen the Dashboard at any time from the View menu.
Call Logging Main Window

The Call Logging main window contains components to help you access information and commands in
Call Logging. Components include:
• Menu Bar
• Toolbar
• Call Status Banner
• Tabbed Layout
• InfoCenter
• Call Record Tab Bar
• Call Record Controls
• Attachments Toolbar
• Status Bar
Menu Bar
The dockable menu bar provides access to Call Logging functions (dock the menu bar to the bottom,
top, or either side of the Call Logging main window by dragging the bar to the desired location).
Menus include:
• File Menu ‐ Accesses commands for manipulating Call Records such as saving, locking, printing,
viewing attachments, etc.
• Edit Menu ‐ Accesses commands for manipulating record data, as well as commands for
customizing your user preferences, toolbars, field validations, etc.
• View Menu ‐ Accesses commands for displaying the different Call Record forms, components of
the Call Logging window, SupportMail, alarms, and Activity Logs.
• Group Menu ‐ Accesses commands for finding Call Records and managing Call Groups.
• Customer Menu ‐ Accesses the four Customer Record forms for the selected customer, as well
as Profile attachments and Simple Search options.
• Solution Menu ‐ Provides additional search methods and launches the loaded knowledge base.
10 HEAT
• Accessory Menu ‐ Accesses commands for table maintenance, the HEATBoard, asset
configuration, email functions, etc.
• Report Menu ‐ Accesses commands for managing reports.
• AutoTask Menu ‐ Accesses commands for managing AutoTasks and lists the available AutoTasks.
• Window ‐ Accesses display options for information in the Call Logging window.
• Help ‐ Opens online help, a link to the FrontRange Solutions Home Page, and information about
the application.
Note: When a Customer Record is active in the Call Logging main window, the
toolbar and menu bar change to accommodate customer‐specific commands
(for example, the Group menu accommodates Customer Groups and the
AutoTask menu accommodates customer AutoTasks) You can also use shortcut
keys to access the menu functions (refer to "Shortcut Keys"). Some of the
individual options under each menu item also have shortcut keys; they appear
to the right of the option.
File Menu
This menu accesses commands for manipulating Call Records such as saving, locking, printing,
viewing attachments, etc. Menu items include:
• New Call Record ‐ Opens a new, empty Call Record applying the next available Call ID
number. You can also click the New Call Record button on the toolbar.
• Save Call Record ‐ Saves the current Call Record to the database. You can also click the Save
Call Record button on the toolbar.
• Lock/Unlock Call Record ‐ Locks or unlocks the current Call Record. Locking a Call Record
means that only one person is allowed to modify the Record at any given time. This helps
prevent Call Record information from being overwritten in the database. You can view a
listing of all locked calls by selecting Accessory>Locked Calls.
• Unlock All My Calls ‐ Unlocks all of the current user's Call Records. Users are the only ones
who can unlock their own calls. A Call Record is unlocked automatically when you save or
close the call, or when you click the Lock button.
• Customer Type ‐ Opens the Customer Type dialog box, in which you can select the Customer
Type for a new Call Record (such as Company, Employee, and Equipment). When you make
this selection, place your cursor in a validated field in the Subset and press F9 to see
validated values specific to the Customer Type.
• Reopen Call Record ‐ Reopens the selected Call Record. Use this option when you need to
modify a closed Call Record. When you select this menu item, the Call Status changes to
Reopened and a Journal entry is created with the Closed Description and Cause Code. In
addition, the Cause Code, Closed Description, Closed By and Closed Date/Time fields in the
Call Record are cleared.
• Quick Close ‐ Automatically populates the Closed fields and closes the Call Record. Using
Quick Close prompts you to fill in any blank required fields and changes the Call Status to
Closed. It also stops the Stopwatch and automatically populates the Closed By fields with
your Login ID and the current date/time. You can also click the Quick Close toolbar button.
• Put Call on Hold ‐ Places the current Call Record on hold. You can only put unsaved Call
Records on hold. Call Logging allows you to put 15 unsaved calls records on hold at a time.
Calls that are on hold are contained in a Calls On Hold Call Group. Any Call Records contained
in this group are only available on the local machine. If your Calls On Hold Call Group is
empty, the menu item is not available.
User Guide 11
Getting Started
• Go to Call ‐ Opens the Go to Call ID dialog box, enabling you to search for a Call Record.
• Abandon Changes ‐ Abandons changes you have made to unsaved Call Records.
• Delete Call Record(s) ‐ Deletes the Call Record from the database. Use caution when
deleting a Call Record, since deleting a Call Record is permanent. The Call Record must be
recreated if you discover it was deleted in error.
• Remove Call from Group ‐ Temporarily removes the Call Record from its current group. For
example, you can remove a Call Record from its group while you archive old data, work
within the Call Group, or display the calls you have not worked on yet. You can also remove
calls from your Hot List in order to print only the remaining calls in the Call Group.
• New Broadcast ‐ Opens the Create Broadcast dialog box, enabling you to use a broadcast
message to alert everyone logged onto Call Logging of an important business issue or event.
• Assignment/Journal ‐ Accesses a submenu with options to add, delete, and edit
Assignments and Journal entries.
• Print ‐ Accesses the Print submenu containing options to Preview the Printout or print the
Call Ticket, Group, or Grid:
» Preview ‐ Allows you to view the Call Record as it will appear on the hard copy.
» Call Ticket ‐ Opens the Print Call Ticket dialog box, enabling you to select the sections
of the Call Record you want to print, the section spacing, the header information, and
the printer.
» Group ‐ Prints the currently displayed group of Call Records using the same print
parameters selected for a single record.
» Grid ‐ Prints the currently displayed grid. Make sure the cursor is within an active grid
window.
• Print Setup ‐ Opens the Print Setup dialog box, enabling you to specify printers, paper
selection and orientation, as well as access advanced print properties.
• Grid Page Setup ‐ Opens the Grid Page Setup dialog box, in which you can specify headers,
footers, margins, and fonts.
• Reset Column Width ‐ Resets the column widths in grid view to their original settings.
• Attachments ‐ Accesses the Attachments submenu containing options to add, edit, and
remove Attachments and add Global Attachments.
• Exit ‐ Closes the Call Logging application and logs you out of the database. Closing Call
Logging any other way does not log you out of the database.
IMPORTANT: When a Customer Record is active in the Call Logging main
window, the File menu changes to accommodate commands specific to
Customer Records.
12 HEAT
Edit Menu
This menu accesses commands for manipulating record data, as well as commands for
customizing your user preferences, toolbars, field validations, etc. Menu items include:
• Undo ‐ Reverses the last activity performed on the Call Record.
• Cut, Copy, Paste ‐ Accesses standard word processing features.
• Validate Field ‐ Calls the validation grid for the active field. You can also open the validation
dialog boxes by pressing F9 while your cursor is in the field you need to validate.
Note: Call Logging stores information in database tables. This information
appears in several fields on the Call Logging form. A field requiring information
from one of these tables is called a validated field. When you import
information from a table into a validated field, HEAT may auto‐fill other
validated fields with information from the table.
• Spell Check ‐ Accesses standard spell‐checking features. Spell Check scans all words within
the active field. You can also access Spell Check by selecting the associated button on the
toolbar.
• Stopwatch ‐ Accesses the Stopwatch submenu where you can start, stop, and edit the
Stopwatch included with Call Logging. The Stopwatch value is displayed on the Call Status
Banner and keeps a running total of the time spent modifying the Call Record. It starts
automatically whenever a change is made to a Call Record field or when a field is validated. It
stops automatically whenever changes are abandoned, the Call Record is saved, or the Call
Record is closed.
• Count ‐ Accesses the Counter submenu where you can edit the counter included with Call
Logging. You can use the Call Counter to keep track of the number of calls about a single
incident. Instead of creating new Call Records for each incoming phone call, the Counter of
the initial record is incremented.
• User Preferences ‐ Opens the User Preferences dialog box, enabling you to customize many
features in HEAT. Doing so determines how Call Logging behaves on an individual
workstation. Most of the options that you can set in User Preferences apply to any HEAT user
opening Call Logging on that computer. Many of the settings are saved in the registry key on
the local workstation.
• Toolbar ‐ Accesses the Toolbar submenu where you can customize your Call Logging
toolbars. The toolbar settings travel with the user to any workstation the user logs on to.
window, the Edit menu changes to accommodate commands specific to
Customer Records.
User Guide 13
Getting Started
View Menu
This menu accesses commands for displaying the different Call Record forms, components of the
Call Logging window, SupportMail, alarms, and Activity Logs. Menu items include:
• Call Log ‐ Changes the display to the Call Log form (the Call Log form is the default display
when you launch Call Logging).
• View Detail ‐ Changes the display to the Detail form.
• Assignments ‐ Changes the display to the Assignment form.
• Journal ‐ Changes the display to the Journal form.
• Attachments ‐ Changes the display to the Attachments tab.
• Grid ‐ Toggles between the grid view and the form view (this menu option is only available
on the Assignment and Journal tabs).
• Call Status Banner ‐ Toggles the visibility of the Call Status Banner.
• Status Bar ‐ Toggles the visibility of the status bar.
• Toolbar ‐ Opens the Toolbars dialog box, enabling you to see the toolbars that are active,
and turn them on or off. The Toolbars are customizable features in HEAT. You can select
which buttons are displayed or create new buttons for AutoTasks, Call Groups, etc.
• InfoCenter ‐ Accesses InfoCenter display commands including Show Call Map, Show
HEATBoard, Show Favorites, Show CallBrowse, Show Call Groups, Show Auto Task, Show
Customer Groups, Go to Call Map, and Go to HEATBoard.
• SupportMail ‐ Accesses the SupportMail tab with full email functionality. SupportMail can
send and receive messages both within the HEAT system and within external email systems.
• Alarms ‐ Opens the Alarms dialog box, enabling you to create personal reminders to take
action at some future time. Alarms are an extension of SupportMail. Because a Call Record
can be attached to an alarm, the user can then easily retrieve the associated call when the
alarm triggers to check its latest status.
• Activity Log ‐ Opens the Activity Log. The Activity Log is used to track events associated with
a Call Record. When this feature is turned on by the HEAT administrator, Call Logging creates
a new Activity Log entry whenever you work on the call.
• Dashboard ‐ Opens the HEAT Dashboard.
window, the View menu changes to accommodate commands specific to
Customer Records.
Group Menu
This menu accesses commands for finding Call Records and managing Call Groups. Menu items
include:
• New Call Group ‐ Opens the New Call Group dialog box, in which you can define the search
criteria for a new Call Group.
• Open Call Group ‐ Opens the Open Call Group dialog box, enabling you to open an existing
Call Group.
• Simple Search ‐ Accesses the Simple Search submenu that lists the defined Simple Searches.
Using this menu item creates a Call Group based on one value from a single field.
• Close Call Group ‐ Closes the active Call Group.
14 HEAT
• Work Group ‐ Accesses all of the Call Records you created, modified, or opened during your
current working session.
• Calls on Hold ‐ Shows all of the unsaved Call Records you placed on hold.
• My Hot List ‐ Accesses Call Records that you added to your personal Hot List. The My Hot List
Call Group is the only Call Group in which you cannot use search expressions to create the
group. Calls must be added manually. You can add any call including those from different
Customer Types.
• Save Criteria ‐ Saves changes you have made to a Call Group's search criteria.
• Save Criteria As ‐ Saves search criteria. Use this feature when you have edited a Call Group's
search criteria and you do not want to alter the original Call Group. This creates a new Call
Group that uses the new criteria and leaves the original Call Group intact.
• Edit Group Criteria ‐ Accesses a Call Group's search criteria for editing purposes. After you
have edited the criteria, you can either save over the old criteria or save the altered criteria
as a new Call Group.
• Refresh Group ‐ Refreshes the open Call Group. This retrieves any records back into the Call
Group that were temporarily removed with the Remove Call from Group command on the
File menu. The Refresh Group menu command forces the system to re‐query the database
and update the group tab.
• Call Record Navigation ‐ Navigates through Call Records. Accesses First, Previous, Next, and
Last commands.
• Call Record Browse ‐ Displays a grid of Call Records in the currently displayed Group. This is a
grid view of the group's CallLog table entries.
• Refresh Call Record ‐ Refreshes the current Call Record.
• Add Call to My Hot List ‐ Manually adds a Call Record to your default Hot List.
• Add Call to Hot List ‐ Accesses the New Hot List submenu where you can add a Call Record to
a new Hot List.
• Remove Call from Hot List ‐ Removes a Call Record from a Hot List.
window, the Group menu changes to accommodate commands specific to
Customer Records.
Customer Menu
This menu accesses the four Customer Record forms for the selected customer, as well as Profile
attachments and Simple Search options. Menu items include:
• Profile ‐ Provides access to the customer's Profile record for the currently displayed Call
Record. A Profile record contains all relevant information about a customer or employee.
• Contacts ‐ Displays the list of Contacts associated with a customer in grid view. The form
view displays an individual's contact information associated with the customer (for example,
an employee who works for an organization). The contact information can be stored within
the HEAT database in a local validation table or in an external database.
• Configuration ‐ Accesses Configuration Records for the customer listed in the Subset of the
currently displayed Call Record. A single Customer Record can have multiple Configuration
Records associated with it.
• Call History ‐ Displays the Call History grid view for the customer that is currently displayed.
User Guide 15
Getting Started
• Simple Search ‐ Accesses a submenu listing simple search criteria. This option is also used to
define Call Groups based on a simple search (such as search for all open Call Records).
• Search ‐ Locates a Customer Record with a Boolean search. This search is independent of the
currently displayed record. You can search for either Profile, Contact, Configuration or Call
History records.
• Profile Attachments ‐ Sometimes called Customer attachments, Profile attachments link files
or applications to a Customer Profile record.You can also access Profile attachments from the
Call Logging window through Customer>Profile Attachments.
Solution Menu
This menu provides additional search methods and launches the loaded knowledge base. Menu
items include:
• Perform Search ‐ Begins a search based on the words highlighted in the Call Description
field. Once the knowledge engine finishes the search, the FLS button on the toolbar changes
from a tree to a light bulb. Click the light bulb button to view the Search Results dialog box.
• Additional Search ‐ Performs another search by allowing you to customize the query using
selected information in the current Call Record.
• Auto Search ‐ Switches Auto Search on/off enabling HEAT to periodically launch searches
using information from the current Call Record.
• Auto Populate ‐ Automatically creates a node or article within the knowledge tree of a
knowledge base and fills it with information from preselected Call Logging fields (specified as
autopopulate defaults by the HEAT administrator).
• First Level Support or ‐ Launches the knowledge base linked to Call Logging.
Accessory Menu
This menu accesses commands for table maintenance, the HEATBoard, asset configuration, email
functions, etc.
Menu items include:
• Table Maintenance ‐ Opens the Table Maintenance window, enabling you to directly edit
the validation tables in the HEAT database.
• Asset Configuration Window ‐ Accesses a submenu where you can select from Maintenance
or Transfer Assets.
» Maintenance ‐ Opens the Asset Configuration Maintenance window, which enables
you to manage asset details. You can locate an asset, add a new asset, associate an
asset with a customer, delete assets, modify an existing asset, create a new call for an
asset, or select an asset and add it to the currently active Call Record.
» Transfer Assets ‐ Opens the Asset Configuration Maintenance window, in which you
can manage asset ownership by performing three actions: moving an asset to another
customer, copying an asset to another customer, and deleting an asset
• Call Transfer ‐ Transfers copies of Call Records by transferring data in the record through an
email system format, which in turn is reconstructed at another HEAT installation or by
transferring to any other application able to custom process message text data in an email
format.
• Locked Calls ‐ Displays a list of the calls currently locked in the system.
16 HEAT
• HEATBoard ‐ Accesses functions within the HEATBoard. For example, you can view the
current call's information, view details about the issue, link and unlink the current call, set
the lead call, open the group, close linked calls automatically with the AutoClose feature,
edit a HEATBoard issue, delete a HEATBoard issue, or add a new HEATBoard issue.
• Mail ‐ Accesses the Mail submenu where you can access the commands to send mail and to
view attached messages.
• MobileHEAT‐Transfer Calls ‐ Transfers any new or modified Call Records to the main HEAT
database, as well as other system maintenance functions. Call Transfer (often called
synchronization) with the main HEAT system can occur at any time and may be accomplished
via a direct network connection or through a modem/WAN link.
• Set up MobileHEAT Database ‐ Starts the set up procedure. The process of creating a new
database will take several minutes to complete, depending upon the size of the original
database.
Report Menu
This menu accesses commands for managing reports. Menu items include:
• Run Call Ticket Report ‐ Runs a Call Ticket Report based on the defaults that you set from
the Defaults menu in the Run/Edit Report Shortcuts dialog box. This menu item becomes
available after you set the default report for a Call Type or for all Call Tickets through the
Run/Edit Report Shortcuts command. The Call Ticket Report can be set up to automatically
print, to display in the window, to export to a file or application, or to prompt you at run‐
time for specifications.
• Manage Reports ‐ Opens the Manage Reports dialog box, in which you can run, add, edit,
delete, or copy the shortcut to another view.
• Run Crystal Report ‐ Opens the Run Crystal Report dialog box, in which you can run an
existing Crystal Report. Click the Browse button to navigate to an existing report and select
from the Print, Selection Formula, and Data Source options listed.
• Crystal Decisions Crystal Reports ‐ Opens the Crystal Reports Program Location dialog box,
in which you can browse to and open a Crystal Report.
AutoTask Menu
This menu accesses commands for managing AutoTasks and lists the available AutoTasks (and/or
AutoTask categories). AutoTasks automate routine Call Logging activities and combine multiple
operations within one task.
In addition to the list of AutoTasks and categories, menu items include:
• Manage AutoTasks ‐ Opens the Manage AutoTasks dialog box, in which you can run, add,
edit, or delete AutoTasks. This dialog box also lists the defined AutoTasks within Call Logging.
In addition, you can assign a toolbar button to an AutoTask in this dialog box.
• Import ‐ Opens the Import dialog box, enabling you to import AutoTasks exported from
another HEAT system.
• Export ‐ Opens the Export dialog box, enabling you to export existing AutoTasks.
window, the AutoTask menu changes to accommodate commands specific to
Customer Records.
User Guide 17
Getting Started
Toolbar
Use the customizable, dockable toolbar to access common commands. These options are also
available in the Call Logging menu bar.
When a Customer Record is active in the Call Logging main window, the toolbar and menu bar change
to accommodate customer‐specific commands. For example, the Group menu provides Customer
Group options and the AutoTask menu provides customer‐related AutoTask options; toolbar buttons
change to allow you to create and find Customer Records.
Customize Toolbar
You can create a new toolbar or customize the existing toolbar by adding buttons, separators, and
specifying a theme. You can also move, resize, delete, or rename the toolbar. For details and
procedure, refer to "Customize/Create Toolbars".
Toolbar buttons include:
New Call Record ‐ Creates a new Call Record in the Call Logging main window.
Lock the current Call Record ‐ Locks a call so that only one user at a time can
work on a Call Record. When the call is locked, the button displays a key icon.
When the call is unlocked, the button displays an unlocked padlock icon. When
the call is locked by another user, this button becomes unavailable.
Abandon Changes ‐ Closes the current Call Record without saving any of the
information.
Save Call Record ‐ Permanently records the information from the current Call
Record.
Quick Close ‐ Closes the current Call Record and saves it immediately.
Print Current Call Ticket ‐ Prints the current Call Record, including the Detail,
Assignment, and Journal forms.
Validate Field ‐ Opens a dialog box displaying a list of legal values for the
currently selected field.
Spell Check ‐ Checks spelling in the currently selected field.
Cut ‐ Deletes the selected text and copies it to the pasteboard so it can be copied
to another location.
Copy ‐ Creates a copy of the currently selected text.
Paste ‐ Places the text from the pasteboard to the selected location.
New Group ‐ Opens the New Call Group dialog box, in which you can define
criteria for a new Call Group.
18 HEAT
Open Group ‐ Opens the Open Call Group dialog box, enabling you to open a
existing Call Group.
Call Record Browse ‐ Opens the Call Record Browse dialog box, enabling you to
browse through a list of all Call Records within the currently active Call Group.
Refresh Group ‐ Refreshes the group to include any new or updated Call Records.
My Hot List ‐ Opens your personal Hot List.
Arrow keys ‐ Let you scroll through sequential Call Records: first, previous, next,
and last.
Customer Profile ‐ Opens the current customer Profile record.
View Contacts ‐ Opens the current Call Record Contact records.
Customer Configuration ‐ Opens the current customer Configuration records.
Caller History ‐ Opens the current customer Call History records.
FrontRange Solutions ‐ Accesses the Front Range Solutions Web site.
Call Status Banner
The banner area of the main window displays important information about the Call Record currently
open in Call Logging, including:
• Call ID ‐ A unique reference number for the current Call Record. It is automatically generated by
HEAT and displayed on the left end of the banner area.
• Stopwatch ‐ A tool designed to track the time that elapses from opening to closing a Call
Record.
• Count ‐ Keeps track of events associated with the active Call Record. For example, using the call
counter, you can follow how many incoming calls relate to the issue documented in the Call
Record. To change the call counter, press the plus (+) and minus (‐) keyboard keys.
• Status ‐ Displays whether the call is open, closed, reopened, pending, etc.
User Guide 19
Getting Started
To Display/Hide the Banner:
• Select View>Call Status Banner to turn the display of the banner off or on. The last setting is
saved, so when you log off and log back on again, the last setting is retained.
Tabbed Layout
You can set Call Logging to display Call Groups in a tabbed layout mode, which will be helpful when
working with multiple Call Groups. As each Call Group is opened, a tab labeled with the name of that
Call Group displays.
SupportMail and My Hot List will also open as tabs.
Click and drag a tab onto the body of the Call Log form to open that tab in a separate pane; drag the
tab back onto the other tabs to display that tab in the same pane. Click the x located to the right of
the tabs to close the active tab. If you have multiple tabs open such that some tabs are hidden, the
arrow keys to the right of the tabs activate, enabling you to expose the hidden tabs.
To Turn Off the Tabbed Layout Mode:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences.
2 Click the Display tab.
3 Deselect the Tabbed layout check box.
4 Click OK.
To Cascade or Tile the Open Call Groups:
• With Tabbed layout mode deselected, select Window> Cascade, Window>Tile Horizontal, or
Window>Tile Vertical.
InfoCenter
The InfoCenter is located to the left of the Call Record in the Call Logging main window. Two panels
comprise the InfoCenter: one containing the HEATBoard, the Call Map, and Favorites; the other
containing lists of AutoTasks, Call Groups, Customer Groups, and Call IDs (Call Browse).
To Navigate the InfoCenter:
• To view any InfoCenter component, click the corresponding tab.
• Click and drag the right edge of the InfoCenter panel to change the width of the panel.
• Click the Close icon to close each InfoCenter component (which can be reopened from the
View menu).
• Click the Auto Hide icon to hide each InfoCenter panel, leaving two sets of tabs ‐ one set for
the upper panel and one for the lower. Move your mouse over each tab to reopen that tab
to see needed information; move your mouse away from the tab to re‐hide the panel. Click
the Auto Hide icon again to re‐dock each InfoCenter panel.
20 HEAT
Call Record Tab Bar

The Call Record tab bar is located below the Subset form in Call Logging and contains tabs which
enable you to navigate to the various Call Logging forms:
• Call Log (refer to "Working with the Call Log Form")
• Detail (refer to "Working with the Detail Form")
• Assignment (refer to "Working with the Assignment Form")
• Journal (refer to "Working with the Journal Form").
• Attachments ‐ Use the functionality on this tab to attach files to the Call Record (refer to
"Attachments").
For information about the Web tab, which enables you to open a Web page in Call Logging, refer to
the Web Browse action in "AutoTask Actions". This tab can also be used to search the Internet for
specific terms, phrases, etc.; refer to "Search Internet" for details.
Note: The numbers on the tabs indicate the number of records on each tab.
Call Record Controls

Several control buttons are located to the right of the Call Record Tab Bar:
Grid/Form View ‐ Lets you switch from an Assignment or Journal form view to a
grid view of all Assignments or Journal entries.
New Entry ‐ Opens a new Assignment or Journal form when the Assignment or
Journal page is open (click the Assignment or Journal tab).
Abandon Record ‐ Becomes available when you click the New Entry button. You
can abandon your new entry and the Assignment or Journal entry defaults to the
last Assignment or Journal entry.
Arrow keys ‐ Let you scroll through sequential Assignments and Journal Records:
first, previous, next, and last.
To Collapse/Display the Subset:
• Click the up arrow to the right of the Call Record controls to collapse and reopen the Subset.
This minimizes scrolling when entering or viewing data on forms.
User Guide 21
Getting Started
Attachments Toolbar
The Attachments toolbar is located above the main toolbar, below the menu bar:
Add Attachment ‐ Click to add, edit, or remove an attachment.
Edit Attachment ‐ Click to edit the attachment information.
Remove Attachment ‐ Click to remove the attachment from the Call Record.
View Activity Log ‐ Click to display the activity log for the current Call Record.
View Transfer Log for Current Call ‐ Click to display the transfer log for the
current Call Record.
View Attached Messages ‐ Click to display email messages attached to the
current Call Record.
Global Attachments ‐ Click to open the Global Attachments dialog box, in which
you can view, add, edit, or remove global attachments.
Note: You can create a new toolbar or customize the existing toolbar by adding
buttons, separators, and specifying a theme; click the drop‐down arrow at the
right side of the toolbar and click Customize, click the Commands tab, then
click and drag the desired command onto the toolbar. You can also move,
resize, delete, or rename the toolbar.
To Display/Hide the Attachments Toolbar:
• Select View>Toolbar to turn the display of the Attachments toolbar off or on. The last
setting is saved, so when you log off and log back on again, the last setting is retained.
22 HEAT
Status Bar
The status bar is located at the very bottom of the Call Logging window and displays system prompt
messages associated with the selected data field, displays the current data source, and displays the
following buttons (from left to right):
Validated Field ‐ This button is available if your cursor is in a validated field.
Double‐click to access a list of values.
Required Field ‐ Indicates your cursor is in a required field (the button becomes
available).
Resolve Assignments in Order ‐ When this button is available it indicates that
assignments for the active Call Record must be resolved in chronological order.
HEATBoard ‐ This button becomes available when a new HEATBoard issue is
posted. Double‐click to access the HEATBoard in the InfoCenter.
Alarms ‐ Double‐click this button to open the Alarms dialog box, in which you can
set up alarm parameters to remind you of any event. The alarm button will turn
bright yellow if you set it up to do so in Edit>User Preferences>SupportMail.
SupportMail ‐ This button becomes available if you have SupportMail waiting.
Double‐click to open the SupportMail tab.
To Display/Hide the Status Bar:
• Select View>Status Bar to turn the display of the Status bar off or on. The last setting is
saved, so when you log off and log back on again, the last setting is retained.
User Guide 23
Getting Started
24 HEAT
3
Call Logging is comprised of powerful functionality designed to streamline every aspect of your call‐taking
operation.
Call Logging features include:
• Call Records and Customer Records track pertinent call and customer information.
• Call Groups and Customer Groups organize various types of calls/issues or customer records
into orderly categories.
• The InfoCenter (located to the left of the Call Record) displays the HEATBoard, where issues
affecting specific teams, or the organization as a whole, can be posted, and the Call Map, a
repository for detailed information pertaining to the current call. Additional tabs provide quick
access to Call Records, Call and Customer Groups, and AutoTasks. The Favorites tab can be
populated with the most frequently accessed Call IDs, Call and Customer Groups, and
AutoTasks, as well as Internet and file links.
• SupportMail is an email system unique to Call Logging. You can use it to send messages to
anyone using the Call Logging module, and you can send mail externally to any recipient using
GroupWise, Lotus, or MAPI, POP/SMTP‐compliant email protocols.
• Call Logging provides multiple ways of searching for data: Go to Call ID, the Find command, the
profile search, Simple Searching, Quick Searching, and Boolean searches all help you quickly
find the specific information you need.
• AutoTasks enable you to automate routine Call Logging activities and combine multiple
operations within one task. Several operations can be defined to sequentially create a record,
modify a record, send an email, activate an alarm, etc.
• Table Maintenance allows you to directly edit the data within the database tables, if your
system administrator grants you rights to add, edit, view, or delete data.
• Call Logging makes reporting as efficient as possible. You can access the Answer Wizard reports
or create your own. Use the Manager’s Console to review your organization metrics.
Key Terms and Concepts

You should be familiar with the following key terms and concepts found in Call Logging:
• Call Record ‐ A Call Record is the collective information about an individual service issue. Call
Records consist of information stored in five main database tables: Subset, Call Log, Detail,
Assignment, and Journal.
» Assignments ‐ In Call Logging, you can assign responsibility for a task to another person,
and they can acknowledge, resolve, or reassign the issue. When any of these actions are
taken, the automatic User ID, Date, and Time value stamps are placed in the Call Record.
Multiple Assignments can exist within one Call Record.
» AutoTasks ‐ The AutoTask feature offers a quick way to automate routine Call Logging
activities. When an action becomes repetitive, you can create an AutoTask to automate
the action steps by combining several operations within one task. For example, you can
identify several operations to sequentially modify the Call Record, add an Assignment,
send an email, and activate an alarm.
» Journal ‐ The Journal form is intended primarily as a memo field with room to record notes
about the Call Record. When a new Journal entry is created, the User ID, Date, and Time
values are automatically posted. Displaying the Journal entries in chronological order gives
you the complete picture of the sequence of work that occurred on the call.
» Subset ‐ When a call is initiated for a particular customer, selected portions of the Profile
record are copied to and kept with the Call Record in the Subset table. In this way, the
Profile is used as the validation table for the Subset. The Subset is linked to the Profile by
its CustID and CustType fields. The Subset information is saved with each Call Record. Since
the Customer Profile information can be edited or deleted, historical Subset information
saved with a Call Record may or may not be consistent with the customer’s current profile
information. The Subset information displayed differs based upon the selected Customer
Type.
• Customer Record ‐ Used to reference information about a customer and derives its data from
the Profile, Configuration, and Contact tables.
» Call History Form ‐ Presents results from a query of the database rather than from a single
table. The display contains a list of all existing Call Records for a selected customer.
» Configuration Form ‐ Displays information specific to customer equipment and training.
» Contacts Form ‐ Lists the individuals associated with an organization. The form contains a
list of the contacts who call from that organization.
» Profile ‐ Displays information specific to the customer such as name, address, phone
number, etc.
26 HEAT
Key Terms and Concepts
• Customer Type ‐ Customer Type (CustType) is a Call Logging feature that helps to categorize the
various types of customers your organization has. Each Customer Type has its own set of forms
and windows to help you record different information specific to that type. Because call Logging
allows you to identify your own Customer Types and to customize the forms and windows
associated with them, you can define a new Customer Type whenever you want to separate a
group of customers that you need to store unique or specially‐organized information. Because
Call Logging is fully customizable, your Customer Types may be different; however, the demo
data contains the following Customer Types:
» Company ‐ Companies supported by your organization.
» Department ‐ Internal departments for the Help Desk.
» Employee ‐ Employees (end users) supported by your organization.
» Equipment ‐ Equipment supported by your organization.
» Facility ‐ Facilities supported by your organization.
• Call Groups ‐ A Call Group's main function is to display data meeting user‐defined criteria. The
different types of Groups include: Work Groups, Call Groups, Calls on Hold, and My Hot Lists. A
Call Group is a set of Call Records that meet some common criteria. This group is created using
Boolean expressions or a Simple Search.
• Customer Groups ‐ Like a Call Group, the main function of a Customer Group is to display data
meeting user‐defined criteria. A Customer Group is a set of Customer Records that meet some
common criteria. This group is created using Boolean expressions or a Simple Search.
• Call ID Number ‐ The Call ID is a unique, system‐generated number identifying each Call Record.
Call Logging assigns the Call ID number when a new Call Record is created. Call ID numbers are
never reissued even if a call is deleted or a new call is abandoned (not saved to the database).
• Call Type ‐ The Call Type is a field on the Call Logging form used to define the type of problem a
customer is experiencing. Call Types are selected from a predefined list but can be user defined.
The value chosen from the list may call up a Detail window that allows for additional data entry.
Not every Call Type incorporates a Detail window.
• Customer ID ‐ A Customer ID (CustID) is a numeric or alphanumeric identifier assigned to
uniquely identify each customer. It can be up to 25 characters in length. Call Logging does not
automatically assign Customer ID values—the HEAT administrator devises the Customer ID
sequence. The Customer ID links the Customer Record to all of its Call Records.
• Hot Lists ‐ To accommodate the need to display a group of calls not having criteria in common,
a Group type called Hot List is available. The calls in a Hot List are not assembled through a
Boolean query but are manually added to a list recorded in the database and are available for
later retrieval. A personal Hot List called My Hot List is already set up on your system. All you
need to do is add calls to it. You can also create new Hot Lists for personal use or for viewing by
specific teams or the global audience.
• Validated Field ‐ When a field is validated, you can place your cursor in that field and press F9. A
dialog box opens containing a list of appropriate values from which to choose. Using this
feature enables you to access information directly from the database tables and helps you avoid
including inaccurate or misspelled information in the Call Record.
User Guide 27
• View ‐ Call Groups are saved to a view. The view is the audience who can access the Call Group.
When you select a view, the window displays all the Call Groups contained in the view.
» All View ‐ Includes all Global Call Groups and the user's Personal Call Groups.
» Global View ‐ All Call Logging users can access the Group.
» Personal View ‐ Only the user who created the group can access it.
» Team View ‐ A specific team can access the Call Group.
• InfoCenter ‐ The InfoCenter is located to the left of the Call Record in the Call Logging main
window. The components that comprise the InfoCenter are the Call Map, the HEATBoard, and
Favorites, as well as lists of AutoTasks, Call Groups, Customer Groups, Call IDs, which can be
added to the Favorites tab along with Internet and file links.
• Grid/Form Views ‐ Call Logging contains pre‐designed forms for your use. Each form is linked to
a particular database table (or multiple tables) and displays information from that table(s). Both
views are available on a variety of forms such as Table Maintenance, Assignment, Journal, etc.
Some other forms have only one view available.
» Form View ‐ The Form View displays a single record from the table displaying the fields.
Data entry is typically performed in this view. Access it by clicking the active Grid/Form
View button.
» Grid View ‐ The Grid View displays a list of data in a table form. Access it by clicking the
active Grid/Form View button.
28 HEAT
Visualizing the Call Logging Flow
Visualizing the Call Logging Flow

The following diagram depicts the logical progression of logging a call in Call Logging:
Call Logging Process

Understanding the sequential steps a call taker should follow when logging a call is essential to
maximizing Call Logging's versatile functionality. The following phases represent the basic steps in
processing all of the information necessary to properly document and resolve an issue.
Phase 1: Gathering Customer Information
Whether the caller is an internal employee or an external client, the call taker must gather all of
the pertinent information regarding the caller's issue. When the call taker opens a new Call
Record, that user either validates caller information via the validation table or creates a new
customer profile in the Profile form before beginning the discovery process.
User Guide 29
Phase 2: Recording the Call
After the customer information is recorded, the call taker begins a discovery process to determine
the nature of the caller's issue. The description most closely resembling the problem is selected
from the Call Type drop‐down list. There may or may not be a Detail form associated with the
designated Call Type, where the call taker can document more specific information. Additional
information is gathered and typed into the Call Description field. Sometimes the call taker can
immediately resolve the issue. If it is not possible to do so within the first call, however, the call
taker commonly assigns the issue to another technician with expertise in resolving that particular
Call Type.
Phase 3: Assigning Calls
The call taker clicks the Assignment tab at the top of the main Call Logging window, opening the
Assignment form where the issue is delegated to the appropriate technician. The receiving
technician monitors assignments by creating Call Groups meeting specific, pre‐defined criteria. If
the designated technician is not the correct person to resolve the issue, the call can be
reassigned. When the appropriate technician receives the assignment, the technician
acknowledges that assignment. The issue owner, or tracker, has ultimate responsibility for the
resolution of the issue, and that person can track the Call Record as it progresses through various
Call Groups.
Phase 4: Researching and Creating a Journal Entry for the Call
There are a variety of tools to aid the technician or call taker in call resolution. The user can
perform a knowledge search using HEAT Plus Knowledge, post an issue on the HEATBoard to help
other call takers, or possibly create an AutoTask to expedite a repetitious process. The technician
or call taker can make Journal entries containing relevant findings using the Journal form. In this
way, pertinent information regarding the specifics of the call are stored within the Call Record.
Phase 5: Resolving and Closing the Call
When the issue is resolved to the customer's satisfaction, the Assignment form is marked as
resolved by the attending technician, and the resolution information is entered in the Solution
Description and Cause fields in the Call Log form. The Call Status is then updated to reflect a value
of Solved. At this point, either the technician can perform a Quick Close operation, or the owner
can close all owned issues in Solved status.
How Call Logging Works with Other Modules

• HEAT Messaging Center ‐ The HEAT Messaging Center (HMC) provides an automated process
for generating Call Records from e‐mail, XML or text files, or using Web Services, enabling the
service/support desk to address customer issues logged during nonstandard hours, or as a
customer option in lieu of a phone call. HMC performs other functions facilitating the customer
or user work process: it updates Call Records, creates and updates Customer Records, as well as
Configuration records, and lets customers perform information queries regarding their existing
Call Ticket(s). If HMC fails to create or update a record, an error handler can create an incident
Call Record.
• Alert Monitor ‐ Allows users to set up alerts notifying them when new Call Records are created,
Assignments are made, and/or when SupportMail messages are received ‐ whether or not the
user is logged on to Call Logging. Alert Monitor works with Call Logging to notify the user of
these important events. Many features are customizable; the user decides what alerts to
establish, how often to poll the database for specific events, and what action to take when an
alert condition is detected. Alerts are created based on the established Call Groups in Call
Logging
30 HEAT
How Call Logging Works with Other Modules
• HEAT Plus Knowledge ‐ Use HEAT Plus Knowledge to build a library of your organization’s
knowledge and expedite the closing of Call Records. The HEAT Plus Knowledge integration with
Call Logging allows you to perform cross‐program tasks including:
» Searching ‐ You can execute knowledge entry searches directly from Call Logging or from
HEAT Plus Knowledge. Advanced searching options allow you to search external search
engines.
» Post Solution ‐ When you find a solution to the issue on the current Call Record, you can
automatically copy the text from the knowledge entry to an administrator‐defined Call
Record field.
» Auto Populating ‐ You can quickly pass new solutions on the Call Record to HEAT Plus
Knowledge to create a new knowledge entry.
• Business Process Automation Module ‐ The Business Process Automation Module (BPAM) is
used to create, monitor, and execute Call Record conditions; these conditions are called
Business Rules. This module allows you to automate the process of monitoring and resolving
important events and time‐sensitive activities. As a result, efficiency is improved and issues are
resolved in a professional and timely manner.
• Answer Wizard ‐ Using the Answer Wizard query tools, you can choose from numerous
predefined reports built for your database that focus on current and past performance. Answer
Wizard provides reports that you can view, print, export, or save.
• Manager’s Console ‐ Manager’s Console provides at‐a‐glance summaries of the overall status of
a Support Center or sales department. It allows managers to proactively review and manage
critical business issues and facilitate future responses to recurring problems. Within a wizard,
you define Metrics to monitor issues, set thresholds, and specify an action to take when
threshold levels are reached. Managers are able to go from gauges to a graph or to a Call Group.
User Guide 31
32 HEAT
4
Call Records
A Call Record (sometimes referred to as a Call Ticket) is comprised of the collective information about an
individual issue. When a Call Record is created, the Call Log form opens, enabling you to document the
caller and issue. Shortcuts keys are available to facilitate form data entry. Refer to "Working with Call
Records" for procedures related to various Call Record tasks including creating, opening, and closing Call
Records.
A Call Record is made up of five forms (sometimes referred to as records) that are tabbed for easy access.
Each form (or record) is stored as a table in the database. An Attachments tab is also displayed, allowing
you to attach files to the Call Record.
• Subset Form ‐ Appears at the top of the window and remains there regardless of which form is
activated below it. The Subset contains profile data for the currently open Call Record (refer to
"Working with a Subset").
• Call Log Form ‐ Designed to give you an overview of the Call Record and provide the current
status of the call (refer to "Working with the Call Log Form").
• Detail Form ‐ Provides additional information about the issue (refer to "Working with the Detail
Form"). The fields in the Detail form are based on the Call Type the call taker assigns the Call
Record. Not every Call Type has an associated Detail Form.
• Assignment Form ‐ The form in which you assign the issue to the party responsible for resolving
the matter. There are three steps involved in Assignments: Assigning, Acknowledging, and
Resolving (refer to "Working with the Assignment Form"). A Call Record can contain multiple
Assignments.
• Journal Form ‐ Intended primarily as a memo field with room to record notes about the Call
Record (refer to "Working with the Journal Form"). A Call Record can contain multiple Journal
entries. Reviewing these entries in chronological order is an effective way to understand the
progress made on an issue.
• Attachments tab ‐ Use the functionality on this tab to attach files to the Call Record (refer to
"Attachments").
Call Records
Working with Call Records

You can perform the following tasks for Call Records:
• Open Call Records
• Create New Call Records
• Save Call Records
• Close Call Records
• Reopen Call Records
• Update Call Records
• Delete Call Records
• Lock and Unlock Call Records
• Put Call Records On Hold
• Create Alarms
Open Call Records

Use the Go to Call ID function to open and review Call Records.
To Open and Review Call Records:
1 Select File>Go to Call ID. The Go to Call ID dialog box opens.
2 In the field, type the Call ID number you want to open.
3 Click OK. The Call Record opens in the Call Logging window.
If you do not know the Call ID number, there are additional methods to locate and open an
existing Call Record:
• From the current Call Record, navigate through the active Call Group using the navigation
arrows on the main Call Logging window toolbar. Select Group>Call Record Browse. The Call
Record Browse ‐ Work Group dialog box opens, listing all of the Call Records generated in
the current session. You can select the Call Record you need from the list. You can also export
the Call Records to an Excel spreadsheet, as an XML file, or as a text file ‐ refer to "Export
Call Records" for more information.
• To search the entire database, from the Group menu, select Simple Search. The Simple
Search feature finds Call Records based on a single field in the record.
• To search the entire database, select Customer>Search. This search finds all of the records
for a single customer. You can select the Call Record you need from the list.
Create New Call Records

A new Call Record is normally created for each customer issue. The following steps describe how to
complete the Call Log form, which is the first part of the Call Record.
To Create a New Call Record:
1 Create a new Call Record in one of the following ways:
• Click the New Call Record button in the toolbar
• Select File>New Call Record.
34 HEAT
• With any Call Record open, right‐click the Call Log form; a shortcut menu opens. Select New
Call Record. A new Call Record opens and is assigned a unique Call ID number by the HEAT
system.
2 The Customer Type dialog box opens. The following Customer Types are predefined in the
HEAT demo data:
• Company ‐ Company profile Information
• Department ‐ Internal departments for the Help Desk
• Employee ‐ Employee profile Information
• Equipment ‐ Equipment profile Information
• Facility ‐ Facility profile information
3 When you choose the Customer Type, the cursor defaults to the first field in the Subset.
• Press F9 to validate the Subset or select Customer>Profile>Record>New if the entity calling
is not already in the database. When you select the customer, all fields in the Subset are
populated.
• Press F6 to move directly to the Description of Incident field in the Call Log form.
Note: The up arrow to the right of the Call Record Controls enables you to
collapse and reopen the Subset. This minimizes scrolling when entering or
viewing data on forms.
4 In the Description of Incident field, type the details the customer relates about the issue they
are having.
5 Based on the information the customer gives you, select a Call Type from the Incident/
CallType drop‐down list. The Call Type may or may not have an associated Detail Form.
6 The Call Status field defaults to Open.
7 In the Source field, select a source (describes how the customer contacted you) from the drop‐
down list. The default source, Phone, is automatically populated.
8 In the Priority field, select the call priority. A default priority is automatically selected based on
the Call Type. You can keep the default or revise it.
9 In the Category field, select the category of the call. The available categories are based on the
Call Type you selected.
10 The Owner field defaults to the currently logged‐on user. You can select a different owner from
the drop‐down list. This is the person ultimately responsible for the successful resolution of
the Call Record.
11 If you can determine the cause immediately, select the appropriate value from the Cause drop‐
down list. The values listed are also based on the Call Type you selected.
12 If applicable, select the customer service rating from the Customer Service Rating drop‐down
list.
13 Save the Call Record by selecting File>Save Call Record.
User Guide 35
Call Records
Save Call Records

You should save all pertinent Call Record data to the database, whether the Call Record is new,
revised, updated, or resolved, regardless of which user creates or changes the record.
When you save the call, the fields at the top of the Call Log form (in the header) are updated with the
Login ID, current date, and current time. These fields are updated if any of the five main Call Record
components (Subset, Call Log, Detail, Assignment, Journal) are modified.
If you have not yet saved an open Call Record, and you attempt to either close HEAT or open a
different Call Record, HEAT prompts you to save the Call Record. You must populate specific fields
before you can save the Call Record: Subset form and CustID field, then Call Log form, Description
and Call Type fields. In addition, the administrator can establish system defaults requiring the
creation of an Assignment before allowing the call to be saved (helpful when the business model
requires a designated technician to resolve call tickets).
To Save Call Records, do one of the following:
• Select File>Save Call Record.
• Click the Save Call Record button on the toolbar.
• Set up your system to always save Call Records without prompting by selecting Edit>User
Preferences>Prompts Tab>Automatically save calls without asking.
Stopwatch
The Stopwatch, which is visible below the toolbar, automatically starts counting from the time a
Call Record is created, modified, or reopened until it is saved. The time on the Stopwatch
represents the cumulative time spent working on the Call Record. The Stopwatch can be edited by
selecting Edit>Stopwatch>Edit menu option. The Edit>Stopwatch option also enables you to
start and stop the Stopwatch.
Abandon Changes to Call Records

If you have the appropriate rights, you can abandon a Call Record. Abandoning a Call Record is
helpful when the issue is minor and business practice dictates you do not need to save the
information. Any changes made to the record after the most recent, prior save are not saved to
the database. If you abandon a new call, the Call Record is not saved, and the next Call Record Call
ID reflects the subsequent available, sequential number.
To Abandon Changes to a Call Record, do one of the following:
• Within the Call Log form, select File>Abandon Changes.
• Click the Abandon Changes button on the toolbar.
• Close out of the Call Record without saving, and when the Save Call dialog box opens, click
Abandon.
• Set up your system to always abandon Call Records without prompting if an existing call is
selected from the Customer Call History (helpful if you identify an existing call addressing the
same customer issue after creating a new call). Select Edit>User Preferences>Display Tab>If
an existing call is selected, abandon new call without asking. You must also select Show Call
History on new calls in order to make available the abandon option.
36 HEAT
Save/Abandon/Cancel Prompt
If you attempt to close Call Logging or exit the Call Record before saving (and if you have not
selected either the save automatically or abandon automatically options in User Preferences),
you will be prompted to:
• Save ‐ Saves the Call Record.
• Abandon ‐ Abandons the changes and does not save the Call Record.
• Put on Hold ‐ Puts the Call Record on hold. You cannot exit Call Logging until you save or
abandon any Call Records on hold.
• Cancel ‐ Returns you to Call Logging or to the Call Record you attempted to exit.
• Don’t ask‐just save automatically ‐ Prevents this prompt from appearing in the future,
saving the record automatically. If you go to Edit>User Preferences>Prompts Tab, you will
see the Automatically save calls without asking check box is selected.
Close Call Records

You can close a Call Record when the problem is resolved or otherwise becomes inactive. After you
close records, you can track them to provide input for HEAT reports.
To Close a Call Record:
1 In the Call Log form of a Call Record, type a description of how the issue was resolved in the
Solution Description field.
2 Press the Tab key to advance to the Cause drop‐down list. Type a cause, or select a cause from
the list.
3 Select File>Quick Close. You can also right‐click in the background of the Call Log form to open
the shortcut menu, then click Quick Close.
Note: If you do not populate the required fields before closing, the Close
Required Fields dialog box opens, listing the fields you must fill before you can
close the call. Select Edit Call to populate those fields. You will also be prompted
to fill in all fields required to save the Call Record, if those fields are still empty.
Refer to "Save Call Records" for more information.
4 When closed, the Call Status on that Call Record is changed to Closed. You cannot edit a closed
Call Record without reopening the record. The Call Status would then change to Reopened.
Reopen Call Records

After you create, save, and close a Call Record, you can reopen it as needed. The administrator can set
a security right mandating the user reopen a closed Call Record before being allowed to modify it. A
Closed Call status often has statistical, billing, and customer service consequences. By choosing this
security right, you know that any Call Record reflecting a Reopened status was previously a Closed
issue that was reopened and modified.
To Reopen a Call:
1 Find the closed Call Record you want to reopen.
2 Select File>Reopen Call Record. A Call Logging dialog box opens asking if you would you like to
move the solution text to the Journal.
User Guide 37
Call Records
3 If you click Yes:
• The Call Status changes to Reopened.
• The Closed Description and Cause Code are removed and posted to a new Journal entry.
• The Cause Code, Closed Description, Closed By, Closed Date and Time fields are cleared
from the Call Log form.
4 If you click No, the Call Status changes to Reopened. All other closed information remains in
the closed fields.
Update Call Records

You can update any unlocked, non‐closed Call Record. If the Call Record is closed, you can reopen it
before updating. You can update most of the information in a Call Record, including the Customer ID
and Customer Type. Most updates add information to the record providing additional information
about the issue and the resolution.
To Update a Call Record:
2 Type the Call ID of the Call Record you wish to update. Click OK. That Call Record opens to the
Call Log form.
3 Move your mouse over Locked‐Unlocked icon to make sure this Call Record is unlocked.
4 Check the Status field to make sure the call is not closed.
5 Click the tab of the form you want to update.
6 Edit the fields.
7 Select File>Save Call Record.
Delete Call Records

If a Call Record becomes obsolete you can permanently delete it. You must have special security rights
to delete Call Records. The Call Record you want to delete must be the active Call Record in the Call
Logging window.
WARNING: Deleted Call Records are not written to a temporary directory on
the server or the workstation. Restoring them from an archive backup file is the
only way to recover them from an accidental deletion (and the ability to do so
depends upon how recently the backup database was created), so use caution
when deleting Call Records.
To Delete a Call Record:
1 Select File>Delete Call Record(s). A Call Logging dialog box opens, asking you to confirm the
deletion.You can delete the current record or all records in the active group.
• Selecting Current deletes the currently active Call Record; a Call Logging dialog box opens,
asking you to confirm the deletion.
38 HEAT
• Selecting Entire Group deletes all the Call Records in the currently active group; a Call
Logging dialog box opens, asking you to confirm the deletion of all call in the group.
Note: Deleting large groups of Call Records may require extensive time
depending upon computer, database, network connection speed, and other
factors. It might take up to one hour to remove 1000 Call Records. Deleting a
call removes all components of the Call Record including associated entries in
the CallLog, Detail, Asgnmnt, and Journal tables. The HEAT administrator may
find the Delete>Entire Group function useful for managing database size after
saving an archive database.
2 Click Yes. Depending upon your selection, the current record or the group is deleted.
Lock and Unlock Call Records

When someone is working in a Call Record, it is automatically locked. It remains locked until the
record is saved, closed, or changes are abandoned. You cannot unlock a call that is locked by another
user. If you attempt to modify a call locked by another user a warning dialog box opens.
During a typical workday, the Call Logging process may see a heavy volume of activity, and calls lock
and unlock continuously. Click the Refresh Group button to ensure the most recent information is
displayed.
Additionally, a call is locked when the system places an entry in the HEATLock table for that call. For
this reason, it is possible to create an orphan database entry by illegally exiting Call Logging (for
example, during a power outage, workstation crash, etc.) If this occurs, the administrator can unlock
the call if the user is no longer logged on to the system. If a live system database is copied for backup,
calls locked during the backup remain registered as locked. If this database is used to restore, the
administrator may need to unlock these calls. The individual who originally locked the call can also
unlock it.
To Lock or Unlock a Call Record:
• Click the Lock button located on the main toolbar. The button turns from an unlocked to a
locked padlock.
• Click again to revert back to the unlocked status or select File>Unlock Call Record or
File>Unlock All My Calls.
View Locked Call Records

You must be granted the appropriate security rights by your HEAT administrator in order to view
this list.
To View Locked Calls:
1 Select Accessory>Locked Calls. The Locked Calls dialog box opens.
2 You can choose to view calls locked by all users or by individual trackers; select the desired
option from the Tracker drop‐down list.
Note: Navigate to a locked call by clicking Go to Call.
User Guide 39
Call Records
Put Call Records On Hold

If you create a new Call Record but are not ready to save it to the database, you can put it on hold.
Only unsaved calls may be put on hold. The maximum number of calls you can simultaneously place
on hold is 15.
WARNING: Because a Call Record on hold is not saved in the database, you
lose all Call Records on hold if your system administrator commits an Edit Set
while the calls are on hold.
When you place a call on hold, HEAT creates a special Calls On Hold Call Group. This group works like
any other group in Call Logging, but the group's calls are only viewable from the local computer. The
call data is saved to the local hard drive as an .hld file in the installed directory. In addition, a registry
key entry is created. It is labeled Calls On Hold. This registry key records the data source and database
version number as well as the individual Call ID numbers, thus ensuring the Calls On Hold Group can
be recreated and saved to the main database if a user exits Call Logging. If the group is empty (all calls
either saved or abandoned), it is an inactive option on the menu. If you attempt to exit the Call
Logging application while you have calls on hold, a No Exit, Calls on Hold dialog box opens, reminding
you to handle your on hold calls before exiting. The HEAT administrator has the option to deactivate
the No Exit, Calls on Hold dialog box, but FrontRange Solutions strongly recommends keeping the
default setting that prevents exiting Call Logging with calls on hold.
On Hold Call Group

You may want to put a record on hold when you have not yet saved the call, but you need to
create another Call Record. The Calls on Hold Call Group is created automatically when you put a
Call Record on hold. Access this Call Group by selecting Group>Calls On Hold.
To Put a Call On Hold
Do one of the following:
• Select File>Put Call on Hold.
• Press Ctrl+H.
To Retrieve a Call on Hold
• Select Window>Calls on Hold
• Select Group>Calls on Hold.
Create Alarms
You can create an alarm and attach a Call Record to it to inform yourself of an urgent matter. Alarms
either pop up or display in color in the Status bar.
To Set an Alarm:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select View>Alarms. The Alarms dialog box opens.
2 Click New. The Create Alarm dialog box opens.
3 If you want to attach the currently active Call Record to the alarm, select the Attach Current
Call check box.
4 In the Date field, select the date when you want the alarm to trigger (click the down arrow
next to the Date field to activate the Date Selection tool, then select a date in the calendar).
40 HEAT
Working with a Subset
5 In the Time scroll box, type or select the time when you want the alarm to trigger.
6 In the Subject field, type a brief subject for the alarm.
7 In the Note field, type the alarm message.
8 Click OK.
To Set Display Options for the Alarm:
• Select Edit>User Preferences>SupportMail Tab.
To View and Edit an Alarm:
• Select the alarm in the Alarms dialog box, then click Edit. The Edit Alarm dialog box opens, in
which you can modify your alarm parameters.
To Delete an Alarm:
• Select the alarm in the Alarms dialog box, then click Delete.
To Respond to an Alarm:
The Alarm dialog box provides a number of options for responding to the alarm.
• Disable ‐ Stops the alarm from executing.
• Snooze ‐ Delays the alarm (for about 5 minutes).
• Reset ‐ Opens the Edit Alarm dialog box, enabling you to change the alarm settings.
• Go to Call ‐ Opens the Call Record linked to the alarm.
Working with a Subset

The Subset is comprised of specific information drawn from the Profile table. This collection of
information is made up of the items your HEAT administrator chooses to include, based on data the
administrator feels users need to refer to most often. The Subset form appears at the top of the Call
Record regardless of which form is visible below it. The up arrow to the right of the Call Record Controls
enables you to collapse and reopen the Subset. This minimizes scrolling when entering or viewing data on
forms.
The purpose of the Subset form is to ensure that fundamental data about the caller is saved with the Call
Record. The Subset display does not change even as you navigate the different Call Record tabs; as a
result, this data is always visible as you process the call. However, because the related Profile data can
change over time, it is possible that different Call Records for the same customer can show different
Subset information. Since the Subset is saved with each call, the customer information at the time of the
call remains intact.
The administrator should design the Subset to display only the information necessary for resolving the
current issue. If HEAT users need more detailed information about the customer, they can easily view the
entire Profile form (select Customer>Profile). The Subset is linked to the Profile table by its CustID and
CustType fields. Although there may be several different Subset forms (each based on a different
Customer Type), the data elements for all of them are saved to a common Subset table in the database.
The ID field in the Subset form has validation capability (F9). This enables Call Logging to automatically
populate the customer name, phone number, and other basic information already held in the database.
User Guide 41
Call Records
Validate Subsets
To avoid errors, you can validate the Subset form from the Profile table.
To Validate the Subset:
1 Place your cursor in the ID field, then select Edit>Validate Field or press F9. The Validate from
Profile dialog box opens.
Note: You can also right‐click in the ID field, then select Validate Field.
2 Select the desired name from the list, then click OK (or you can double‐click your selection).
3 The Subset form is populated with data from the Profile table.
Working with the Call Log Form

The Call Log form is common to all Customer Types and is designed to give an overview and the current
status of the call. When you create a new Call Record, a blank Call Log form displays. Data collected in this
form is stored in the CallLog table in the HEAT database.
Call Log Form Fields

Because HEAT forms are customizable by the HEAT administrator, the fields described below may
not appear on your form or may have different labels.
• Incident Log and Solution Information ‐ These two fields are set up as memo fields, both of
which can hold up to 64KB of text characters. They are used to record the customer‐described
problem and the final solution. Entries provide a general understanding of the call and may also
be used to populate knowledge bases for sharing problem‐solving experiences.
• Call Status ‐ The Call Status automatically defaults to Open when you create a new Call Record.
Some other values for this field may include:
» Closed ‐ Triggers a system‐generated stamp in the Closed By fields with the appropriate
Call Logging user and date/time entries.
» Reopen ‐ With appropriate rights, you can reopen a closed call. The previous closed
information can remain, or you can move it to a Journal entry.
» Responded ‐ This is an additional Call Status type that may be useful for grouping or
reporting. No system‐generated transactions are triggered by this status.
» Solved ‐ An additional level of Call Status that may be useful for grouping or reporting. For
example, a user might select the Solved Call Status if the user does not have rights to close
a Call Record. A manager might create a Call Group of all Calls with the Solved status and
go through them individually to make sure they meet all business criteria, then close them.
No system‐generated transactions are triggered for this status.
• Source ‐ Contains values describing the various methods by which the customer can initially
contact your organization with the issue.
• Incident / Call Type ‐ Provides a way to classify the type of problem a customer is experiencing
and is used extensively for reporting purposes. This value is used to determine which associated
Detail form displays in the adjacent tab. You must provide a value in the Call Type field to save
or close the call.
• Priority ‐ Often set to automatically populate using a default value, depending upon the Call
Type selected. High or low relative urgency values (1 = highest priority) are preset but can be
redefined according to business needs. The priority description auto fills when the priority is
selected.
42 HEAT
Working with the Detail Form
• Owner ‐ Defaults to the current Login ID but you can (through User Preferences) set it to any
other Call Logging user as a personalized default. You can use this value to identify the person
responsible for the call, who may not necessarily be the person indicated in the Received By
field. You can change this value on individual Call Records.
• Cause ‐ Allows the user to classify the solution. The Call Type you select determines the values
that are available in the Cause drop‐down list. The list of causes are established in a validation
table for each Call Type. You can modify the causes on the fly or in Table Maintenance.
• SLA Urgency ‐ Contains the values associated with Service Level Agreement urgency. You can
select the appropriate value based on the contract your organization holds with the customer.
• Customer Service Rating ‐ Contains values related to how the customer perceives their service
experience with your organization. The call taker can ask questions regarding performance and
select the appropriate response.
• Received By ‐ This cluster of three fields (UserID, Date, and Time) indicates exactly when the
Call Record was created. The values are automatically stamped according to the user Login ID
and the date/time from the user’s computer. Normally, these are read‐only fields, but the HEAT
administrator can allow editing upon call creation (Edit Received Info security rights).
• Updated ‐ The last update that occurred to any of the Call Record forms is automatically system
stamped into the Login ID, Date, and Time fields. Changes to a Call Record normally indicate
someone is actively working on the call. Good call management may utilize these values for
operational tracking of client responsiveness and staff performance.
• Closed By ‐ Similar to the Received by field cluster in that it uses automatic, system‐stamped
values upon closure of the Call Record. Note that Date and Time fields are used extensively to
calculate call durations and other parameters.
Note: Right‐click the Call Log tab (or grid) to access shortcuts to commonly‐
used commands.
Working with the Detail Form

The Detail form is used to gather additional information about a particular type of call. The Call Type value
selected on the Call Log form determines which Detail form is active. Not every Call Type has an
associated Detail form, since some Call Types do not require gathering additional information.
For those issues requiring further clarification, however, data entry fields on the Detail form allow you to
capture responses, analyze customer problems, or log special information.
Although a variety of Detail forms exist, all data elements are saved to a common Detail table in the
database. You can add Call Types through Table Maintenance and not associate a Detail form with the
new Call Type, or you can add a Detail form and associate it with a Call Type through the customization
options in the Administrator module.
Some Detail forms include fields that draw from Validation tables. Typically, these are identified by drop‐
down arrows displayed to the right of the field. If you begin typing in a validated field (most often the
drop‐down variety), then press Tab, the appropriate Validation table opens. The values for these tables
can be maintained on the fly or in Table Maintenance.
Enter Detail Form Data

The Detail form appearing in the Call Record is based on the Call Type selected on the Call Log
form. The Detail form provides additional, specific questions aiding in the resolution of particular
issues. For example, in the HEAT demo data there are Detail forms for the Change Request,
Employee Setup, Enhancement/Bug, Equipment, From Web, Printer, Product Issue, Purchase
Order, RMA, Service Call, Software, Store Room, and Training Call Types.
User Guide 43
Call Records
To Enter Detail Form Data:
1 Complete the Call Log form.
2 Click the Detail tab. The Detail form for the corresponding Call Type opens.
Note: If the Call Type selected on the Call Log form does not have an associated
Detail form, the Detail tab displays a zero in parentheses (0).
3 Enter data in all of the required fields on the form displayed.
4 Select File>Save Call Record to save your changes.
Edit Detail Forms

If you need to make changes to detail information, you can edit entries in the Detail form.
To Edit a Detail Form:
2 Type the Call ID of the Call Record you want to open. Click OK. The Call Record opens to the
Call Log form.
3 Click the Detail tab. The Detail form displays.
4 Click in the field you want to edit.
5 Select Edit>Validate Field. The Validate from dialog box opens.
6 Click Show All to review all the choices. Click a value, then click OK. The new value auto‐fills the
field.
7 Click the Save Call Record button to save your changes.
Note: To change information in a non‐validated field, highlight the data you
want to change, type over the current entry, then save your changes.
Working with the Assignment Form

The Assignment form/tab provides responsibility tracking. Good customer service practices rely on
monitoring who is responsible for completing certain aspects of the issue resolution. Using this Call
Logging capability helps assure individuals are aware of their responsibilities. Management can also track
unresolved tasks.
You can have multiple Assignments within one Call Record. This many‐to‐one relationship capability
allows you to track delegated tasks. One person may not always be able to resolve an issue, in which case
each assignee would have an Assignment within the Call Record. Use the Navigation arrow buttons at the
bottom to view various Assignments. In addition, the grid view displays a list of all the Assignments for the
Call Record. There are three stages to an Assignment: Create, Acknowledge, and Resolve.
• Create a New Assignment ‐ The person receiving the call (noted in the Assigned by field)
delegates the task to an Assignee.
• Acknowledge an Assignment ‐ The Assignee receives and accepts responsibility for the
Assignment. The status of Acknowledgments is often used for reporting purposes to ensure
response to all Call Records.
44 HEAT
• Resolve an Assignment ‐ The displayed Assignment is completed. This does not change the Call
Status on the Call Logging form. Additional Assignments can still be unresolved for the same
Call Record.
Note: When customizing through an Edit Set, the administrator can designate
individual fields in the Assignment table as Acknowledged Required or Resolved
Required before the Call Record can be saved.
Any of these three actions results in the automatic system stamp of User ID, Date, and Time values in the
Call Record. Normally, you can create another Assignment at any time. Call Logging can also notify you of
overdue Assignments. You must manually create Assignments within the Assignment form. Right‐click
outside any of the Assignment fields to display the Assignment shortcut menu. The same menu options
are available by selecting File >Assignment/Journal.
Although users regularly create and resolve Assignments, the Administrator module System Defaults
allow three options for processing Assignments:
• Require resolution of Assignments before the Call Record can be closed.
• Require an Assignment before the Call Record can be saved.
• Allow only one resolved Assignment to exist at a time.
By selecting Edit>User Preferences>Grid Setting Tab, you can choose options for the Assignment form:
• Select the default view (Grid or Form) for Assignments
• Choose a field used for the sort‐order preference
• Choose ascending or descending for the sort order
• Grid lines can also be activated or disabled in the grid view.
On the Edit>User Preferences>Prompts Tab, you can choose to automatically save Assignments. Using
the File>Assignment/Journal>Reorder Assignments command, you can reorder assignments. This is
especially useful when used in conjunction with the Resolve Assignments In Order option.
Assignment Form Fields

• Group ‐ Used as a method to combine assignees. When choosing a group, only predefined
assignees are available for selection in the Contact field. The table name for this field is
AsgnGrp. Maintenance for this table can be performed on the fly or in Table Maintenance.
• Contact ‐ The values displayed in this field depend on the value in the Group field. The table
name for this field is Assignee. Maintenance for this table can be performed on the fly or in
Table Maintenance. The Assignee information automatically populates when the Contact is
selected.
• Target Date/Time ‐ Indicate the expected completion of an Assignment. Reports can be
formulated to show those calls not meeting operational targets. The table names for these
fields are TargetDate and TargetTime.
• Resolution ‐ The three predefined resolution values are Completed, Partial, and Reassigned.
Additional values can be added through table maintenance for the Resolution table.
Selecting one of these values does not resolve an assignment. This field is used for reporting
purposes.
• Comments ‐ The Comments field is set up as a Memo field, holding up to 64KB of text
characters. It is used to record the technician's notes, which can include problems and/or
solution information. Entries provide a general understanding of the activities performed by
the technician.
User Guide 45
Call Records
Create a New Assignment

If the call taker cannot resolve an issue, it can be assigned to someone else to resolve. Depending
on your protocol, you may assign a Call Record based on workload, knowledge, experience, or
location. HEAT allows you to assign a Call Record to more than one group or technician, with each
resolving a designated portion of the issue. Each Assignment and its associated assignments
become part of the Call Record. This is especially useful when used in conjunction with the
Resolve Assignments In Order option.
To Assign a Call Record:
1 In an active Call Log form, select File>Assignment/Journal>New Assignment; or click the
Assignment tab, right‐click in the background of the Assignment form, and select New
Assignment. The Assignment form automatically opens and fields in the Assignment Created
By section of the Assignment header auto‐fill with current Call Log information.
2 From the Group drop‐down list, select the appropriate group.
3 In the Contact field, select one of the listed contacts. Information about the technician such as
Availability, Out of Office, Phone/Ext, Pager, and Email auto‐fills the fields.
4 In the Comments field, type any comments or instructions about the Assignment.
6 To assign this Call Record to another group or technician, right‐click and select New
Assignment. Repeat steps 2 through 5.
Acknowledge an Assignment
When you receive an Assignment, your first action is to acknowledge it. Your acknowledgment
becomes part of the Call Record, which is stamped with the time and date of your
acknowledgement.
You can create and save a Call Group of all Call Records assigned to you or your department. Each
time you open or refresh that Call Group, you will see any new Call Records assigned to you. Refer
to "Call Groups" for details.
To Acknowledge an Assignment:
1 In a Call Record assigned to you, click the Assignment tab.
2 Select File>Assignment/Journal>Acknowledge Assignment. The Call Record is updated in the
Acknowledge section of the Assignment form with the time, date, and your name.
Note: You can also use shortcut keys to acknowledge Assignments: press
Shift+F2.
Resolve an Assignment
When you resolve an Assignment, you can record the resolution in the Call Record. Resolving an
Assignment does not close a Call Record.
If your system administrator has set the Enforce Acknowledge Before Resolve right, you are
required to acknowledge the assignment before resolving it. If your system administrator has
enforced that assignments be resolved in order, you must resolve assignments in chronological
order. Assignments that must be resolved in order are identified by the active Resolve
Assignments in Order icon in the Status bar.
46 HEAT
To Resolve an Assignment:
2 Type the Call ID of the appropriate Call Record, then click OK. The Call Record opens to the Call
Log form.
3 Click the Assignment tab. The Assignment form displays.
4 Click the Resolve link. The Enter Value dialog box opens.
Note: You can also use shortcut keys to resolve Assignments: press
Ctrl+Shift+F2. The Resolve Required Fields dialog box opens, prompting you to
enter the Resolution and TotalAsgnmntTime (Time Spent field). Select each in
turn, and click Edit Call, which places your cursor in the field to be updated.
Then proceed to step 7.
5 Click Validate. The Validate from Resolve dialog box opens.
6 Select the appropriate resolution code, then click OK. On the Enter Value dialog box, click OK.
7 In the Comments field, type any additional information about the resolution.
Abandon Assignments
You can abandon an unsaved Assignment. If you have already saved the Call Record, you must
delete the Assignment.
To Abandon an Assignment:
1 With the Assignment form open, select File>Assignment/Journal>Abandon Assignment, or
click the Abandon Changes button.
2 Click Yes to confirm abandoning the changes to the current Assignment.
View Assignments
One Call Record can have multiple Assignments. The best way to view a comprehensive list of
these Assignments is in grid view. Each row in the grid represents one Assignment for the selected
Call Record. If you double‐click an Assignment from the grid view, that Assignment displays in
form view.
In the grid view, you can drag and drop the column headers to re‐sort the information. You can
also drag and drop a column header to the area below the tabs (labeled Drag a column header
here to group by that column), enabling you to sort and collapse information.
To View Assignments in Grid View:
Log form.
3 Click the Assignment tab.
4 Select View>Grid, or click the Grid/Form button in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen,
which will toggle between grid and form view.
User Guide 47
Call Records
5 In the grid view, all Assignments for the Call Record are listed. Double‐click the Assignment you
want to view. The selected Assignment displays in form view.
Note: In grid view, you can review the Assignments for an entire Call Group by
using the navigation arrows on the toolbar.
Delete Assignments
You can delete existing Assignments if you have been granted the security rights to do so by your
administrator.
To Delete an Assignment:
1 Click the Assignment tab.
2 Click the Grid/Form button.
3 Click to highlight the Assignment to be deleted.
4 Select File>Assignment/Journal>Delete Assignments.
5 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Working with the Journal Form

The fourth Call Record tab displays the Journal form. This form is intended primarily as a memo field
providing an area to document the chronological progression of the call resolution.
Like the Assignment form, the Journal form also has a many‐to‐one database relationship for each Call
Record. Typically, you would create a Journal entry for each conversation and every major task you
perform on behalf of the customer toward issue resolution. It is most helpful to display the Journal entries
in chronological order, providing an organized view of the sequence of events performed to resolve the
call. Options for displaying Journal entries in a specific order are found in the Call History section of user
preferences (Edit>User Preferences>Grid Settings Tab).
Journal entries are usually created manually. Right‐click outside any of the Journal fields to display the
shortcut menu, which is also available by selecting File>Assignment/Journal. Using the Journal form, you
can transfer text from other sources.
If you reopen a closed Call Record, you are asked if you want to move the Solution text from the
previously closed Call Record to a new Journal entry. If you select Yes, a new Journal is created and
populated with the previous closed information.
By selecting Edit>User Preferences>Grid Setting Tab, you can choose options for the Journal form:
• Select the default view (Grid or Form) for Journal entries.
• Choose a field used for the sort‐order preference.
• Choose ascending or descending for the sort order.
• Grid lines can also be activated or disabled in the grid view.
On the Edit>User Preferences>Prompts Tab, you can choose to automatically save Journal entries.
48 HEAT
Working with the Journal Form
Journal Form Fields

• Journal Created By ‐ When a new Journal entry is created, the user ID, date, and time values
are automatically populated in the Journal header.
• Journal Type ‐ The list of predefined Journal Types. The Journal Type field is validated, and
you must add each new Journal Type to the validation table. This can be done by adding the
record on the fly or in Table Maintenance. Each Journal Type can have an associated Quick
Journal.
• Quick Journal ‐ A Quick Journal is a body of text associated with one specific Journal Type.
When a Journal Type is selected, the Quick Journal auto fills information in the memo field.
You can add or remove information from this memo field as required ‐ up to 64KB of text
characters. You can perform maintenance for the Quick Journal on the fly or in Table
Maintenance.
• Email Journal ‐ This button runs the Quick Message AutoTask: Email this journal to
customer. It sends the Journal entry to the customer's email address, as found in the Subset.
• Notes ‐ An additional memo field holding up to 64KB of text characters.
Create Journal Entries

After the initial call, you should document follow up contacts or actions regarding an issue in the
Journal form.
To Create a Journal Entry:
Log form.
3 Click the Journal tab.
4 Select File>Assignment/Journal>New Journal Entry. An empty Journal form displays.
Note: HEAT automatically fills in the user, date, and time in the Last Modified
area located in the Journal Information title bar.
5 In the Journal Type/Quick Journal drop‐down list, select the correct type.
6 If you selected a Quick Journal, you may or may not have prompt text appearing in the field.
Type additional information relative to this prompt text, or type new journal information.
Note: You can copy and paste information from any other form in the Call
Record into a Journal entry. You can also paste Journal entries into other fields.
User Guide 49
Call Records
Edit Journal Entries

You can edit a Journal entry using a cut, copy, or paste function, or you can type additional text
into the entry. The edited version of the entry overwrites the previous text when you save the Call
Record.
To Edit the Journal Entry:
2 Type the Call ID of the appropriate Call Record, then click OK. That Call Record opens to the
Call Log form.
4 Use the navigation arrows on the toolbar to find the Journal entry you want to edit, or select
View>Grid to see a list of all Journal entries.
5 Type new text, or paste copied text.
View Journal Entries

One Call Record can have multiple Journal entries. The best way to view a comprehensive list of
these entries is in grid view. Each row in the grid represents one entry for the selected Call
Record. If you double‐click an entry from the grid view, that entry displays in form view.
In the grid view, you can drag and drop the column headers to re‐sort the information. You can
also drag and drop a column header to the area below the tabs (labeled Drag a column header
here to group by that column), enabling you to sort and collapse information.
To View Journal Entries in Grid View:
2 Type the Call ID of the appropriate Call Record, then click OK. That Call Record opens to the
Call Log form.
4 Select View>Grid, or click the Grid/Form button in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen,
which will toggle between grid and form view.
5 In grid view, all Journal entries for the Call Record are listed. Double‐click the entry you want to
view. The selected entry displays in form view.
Note: In grid view, you can review the Journal entries for an entire Call Group by
using the navigation arrows on the toolbar.
50 HEAT
Track Call Records
Abandon Journal Entries

You can abandon an unsaved Journal entry. If you have already saved the Call Record, you must
delete the Journal entry.
To Abandon a Journal Entry:
1 With the Journal form open, select File>Assignment/Journal>Abandon Journal Entry, or click
the Abandon Changes button.
2 Click Yes to confirm abandoning the changes to the current Journal entry.
Delete Journal Entries

You can delete existing Journal entries if you have been granted the security rights to do so by
your administrator.
To Delete a Journal Entry:
1 Click the Journal form tab.
2 Click the Grid button.
3 Click to highlight the entry to be deleted.
4 Select File>Assignment/Journal>Delete Journal Entry.
Track Call Records

Open the Activity Log by selecting View>Activity Log, and use it to track events associated with a Call
Record. When the feature is enabled by the HEAT administrator, Call Logging creates a new Activity Log
entry whenever the call is modified. It automatically records the user ID and name of the person
modifying the call, the Call Status during that time, the number of minutes the individual worked on the
record, and several other parameters from the Call Log tab. The HEAT administrator may define several
other custom fields to display in the grid. The administrator also determines if you have Activity Log
editing rights.
Activity log records are saved to the HEATActv table in the database. Requesting the log for a Call Record
displays the query results of all log record entries related to the current Call ID. The Activity Log can be
printed. For Activity Log procedures, refer to:
• Working with the Activity Log
Working with the Activity Log

When viewing the Activity Log, you can drag and drop the column headers to re‐sort the information.
You can also drag and drop a column header to the area labeled Drag a column header here to group
by that column, enabling you to sort and collapse information.
You can perform the following tasks for the Activity Log:
• Add Records to the Activity Log
• Delete Records from the Activity Log
• Edit Records in the Activity Log
• Print the Activity Log
User Guide 51
Call Records
Add Records to the Activity Log

You can manually add new Activity Records to a Call Record. Adding a record to account for
additional time required outside of Call Logging to solve an issue (research, etc.) provides a more
accurate picture of total resources used to successfully resolve the issue.
To Add a Record to the Activity Log:
1 In the currently active Call Record, select View>Activity Log. The Activity Log for Call ID #
dialog box opens.
2 Click the Add Record button. The Add Activity Log Record dialog box opens.
3 The Record Type drop‐down list defaults to OFFLINE. Keep the default.
4 In the Stop Date field, press F3 to auto fill the current date.
5 In the Stop Time field, press F3 to auto fill the current time.
6 In the Duration section, enter the total amount of time you spent working the issue offline in
the hrs, mins, and secs fields.
7 In the Activity Description field, type a record of tasks performed.
8 Click OK. The new Activity Record is added to the Activity Log.
Delete Records from the Activity Log

You can delete a record from the Activity Log.
To Delete an Activity Log Record:
dialog box opens.
2 Select the record you want to delete.
3 Click Delete Record.
4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion. The record is removed from the log.
Edit Records in the Activity Log

You can edit a record in the Activity Log.
To Edit an Activity Log Record:
dialog box opens.
2 Select the record you want to edit.
3 Click Edit Record. The Edit Activity Log Record dialog box opens.
4 Make your changes, then click OK.
52 HEAT
Call Transfer Logs
Print the Activity Log

You can print the Activity Log. The Page Setup function lets you format Header and Footer text,
margins, and select Font specifications.
To Print the Activity Log:
1 With the Activity Log open, click Page Setup.
2 In the Grid Page Setup dialog box, type the header and footer text, select font specifications,
and set margins, then click OK.
3 Click Print.
Call Transfer Logs

The Call Transfer Log tracks the Calls you transfer to another email address or to another system. Your
HEAT administrator must enable this functionality from the Administrator module; a transfer method
must be created before you can move a Call Record out of Call Logging.
After you have transferred a call to another system or email address, Call Logging establishes a log for that
activity. You can then view the log for the current call, which shows all of the transfer activity
corresponding to that specific Call ID.
To View the Call Transfer Log:
• Select Accessory>Call Transfer>View Log for Current Call. A list of the transfers that have
transpired for the currently active Call ID display in the Call Transfer Log ‐ Call ID dialog box.
User Guide 53
Call Records
54 HEAT
5
Call Groups
Call Groups allow you to organize Call Records by priority, type of call, or some other desirable criteria. For
example, you can create a Call Group to cluster all open Call Records. Creating a group allows you to
search for records very quickly. You can also run AutoTasks and reports against groups.
Use of Call Groups facilitates:
• Scheduling your work to make sure it gets completed on time.
• Organizing your work by priority to make sure the most important tasks get done first.
• Tracking your work according to various criteria.
• Alerting you to new calls, calls from important customers, or return calls.
HEAT provides several predefined Call Groups (for example, All Calls contains all of the open calls in the
database). You can use these Call Groups, modify them, or create your own. HEAT also provides a few
special Call Groups: the Work Group which stores all Call Records created or revised on the workstation in
the current Call Logging session, the Calls on Hold group which stores all on‐hold calls, and the My Hot
List group which stores Call Records important to an individual user.
A single Call Record can belong to multiple groups, and a group may include one or more Call Records. A
Call Group is dynamic and changes with Call Records as they are altered. The active Call Group name and
Call Record count appear in the title bar at the top of the window.
For Call Group procedures, refer to:
• Create Call Groups
• Working with Call Groups
• Hot Lists
• Working with My Hot List
• Working with Hot Lists
Call Groups
Create Call Groups

Define the criteria for a Call Group using one of the following:
• Simple Search ‐ One expression or single criterion; for example, all open Call Records: the
expression is Call Status = Open.
• Boolean Search ‐ Multiple expressions or sets of criteria; for example, all open, priority 1 Call
Records: the expressions are Status = Open AND Priority = 1.
The Group menu is used to manage your Call Groups: you can open, create, edit, and delete Boolean Call
Groups, and create Simple Search Call Groups.
You can designate an audience for a Call Group by selecting a View for the Call Group.
You can create a toolbar button for each Call Group and place the buttons on your toolbars for easy
access.
Simple Search
You can create a Call Group to search for a value from a single field using Simple Search; for example,
you can search for all Call Records having the word printer as part of the call description. Simple
Search is a query of one expression or single criterion.
Note: If you want to search based on multiple criteria, you must use a Boolean
Search.
To run a Simple Search, either select your query from a menu list of predefined queries your system
administrator has already set up or right‐click a field on the form. When you search within the group,
the group is narrowed because HEAT looks for the single condition criterion and closes any other
records not meeting the criterion (or, if you are using tabbed layout, the search results appear on a
new tab). You can also specify that a new Call Group be created from the search results.
To Create a Call Group Using a Simple Search:
1 Do one of the following:
• From the Group menu, select Simple Search. From the submenu, select a field to search. The
Simple Search for Field opens for the field you selected.
• To perform a simple search on a field in a Call Record, place the insertion point in the field
and right‐click (or, from the menu, select Group>Simple Search>Current Field). Select
Simple Search from the short‐cut menu. The Simple Search for Field dialog box opens, with
the Value field populated by the contents of the field you selected.
Note: If you want to perform a simple search for a memo or binary field (such
as Incident Description), first select the text you want to use for the search,
then right‐click and select Simple Search. The Value field is populated with the
selected text.
2 From the Operator drop‐down list, select a Logical Operator (for example, =).
56 HEAT
Create Call Groups
3 If you selected or right‐clicked a populated field to begin the simple search (or selected text in
a field), the Value field contains the text from the field. Otherwise, type a value or click Browse
to select a value for the search. Clicking the Browse button opens the Validate from dialog
box, from which you can select a valid value.
Note: If the Validate from dialog box contains a long list of values, you can use
the Quick Search feature to narrow the list. Type the first few characters of the
data for which you are searching and select Search. You can also use the
Boolean Search button to define the data you are searching for (refer to
"Boolean Search"). The Show All button can be used to display all of the
validation table values.
4 Select the Narrow an Open Call Group check box to limit the search to an existing Call Group.
Then select the Call Group in the drop‐down list.
5 To create a new Call Group from the search results, select the Create a New Call Group check
box.
6 Click Run to begin the search. All Call Records that meet your criteria are displayed in the Call
Logging main window.
Boolean Search
You can create a Call Group to search for a value from multiple fields (or conditions) using a Boolean
Search; for example, you can search for all open, priority 1 Call Records: the expressions are Status =
Open AND Priority = 1.
To Create a Call Group Using a Boolean Expression:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select Group>New Call Group. The New Call Group dialog
box opens.
2 Type a name and description for your new Call Group.
3 In the Save to View section, select a View (audience) for your Call Group. If you click Team,
select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list. All users assigned to that team have
access to the Call Group.
User Guide 57
Call Groups
4 To display a Personal Call Group on the HEAT Dashboard, select the Display on HEAT
Dashboard check box. This check box is not available if you selected a Team or Global View.
5 In the Table Name drop‐down list, select the table containing the field you want to use in your
expression. When you select one of the tables, the available fields for that specific table
appear in the Field list.
Note: If you select a Compound table (Detail, Profile, or Subset table), you can
also choose a Table Type. If you choose a Compound table, you can select the
Fields from all Table Types check box to include every instance of a specific
field from all of the available table types in your search criteria. You can also
select @Functions to use in the expression. Only @Functions that are pertinent
to Call Records and Call Groups are available.
6 In the Field list, double‐click a field to add it to the Boolean Expression (for example,
CallStatus).
7 In the Operators list, double‐click a Logical Operator to add it to the Boolean Expression (for
example, =).
8 Click Browse Field Data. The Validate from dialog box opens for the field you selected. All
available options are listed in grid view. Select a value, then click OK (for example, Open).
9 Continue to add expressions:
• Click AND to add another statement. Using AND to join expressions means results must
meet the criteria indicated by all expressions. For example, CallLog.CallStatus='Open' AND
CallLog. CallType='Hardware'.
• Click OR to add a varying statement. Using OR to join expressions means results must meet
any of the criteria indicated by the expressions. For example, CallLog.CallStatus= 'Reopened'
OR CallLog. CallStatus='Open'.
Note: To create a new Call Group designed with a complex Boolean expression,
save time by opening a similar, existing Call Group, modifying the expression,
then performing a Save As under the new group name. Also, the group can be
saved to another view.
10 To define a sorting order for the Call Group, click the Order By button to open the Order By
dialog box. Select the field(s) by which you want to sort the group; for example, if you select
CallID, all records in the group are listed in ascending or descending order (you specify) by
their Call ID numbers. When finished, click OK.
Note: You need to refresh the group before sorting takes effect. To do this, click
Save and Run or manually refresh the group.
11 Click the Check button to verify that your expression text is correct.
12 When you are satisfied with the expression(s) you have defined, click the Run button. All Call
Records that match your criteria are displayed in the Call Logging main window (either in grid
view or form view).
• To save the Call Group without running the search, click Save.
• To save the Call Group and run the search, click Save and Run.
58 HEAT
Working with Call Groups

You can perform the following tasks for Call Groups:
• Open Call Groups
• Edit Call Groups
• Delete Call Groups
• Restore Saved Call Groups
• Save Call Group after Running
• Refresh Call Groups
• Remove Calls from Call Groups
• Create Toolbar Buttons for Call Groups
You can also work with Call Groups on the Call Group tab in the InfoCenter. Call Groups can be added to
the InfoCenter Favorites tab for quick access. Refer to "InfoCenter" for details.
Open Call Groups

You can open a Call Group from the list of Personal, Team, Global, or All (Teams) Call Groups.
To Open a Call Group:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select Group>Open Call Group. The Open Call Group dialog
box opens.
2 In the View section, filter the list by selecting Personal, Team, Global, or All. If you click Team,
select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list.
User Guide 59
Call Groups
3 Select a Call Group in the list, then click Open. The Call Group opens in the main Call Logging
window.
Note: You can also open a Call Group by pressing Ctrl+O, or by clicking the
Open Group button on the Call Logging toolbar.
Edit Call Groups

You can edit the criteria defining a Call Group, changing the data or creating a new Boolean search to
formulate a new Call Group.
To Edit a Call Group:
box opens.
2 In the list of groups, select the group you want to edit (you can filter the list by selecting a
View), then click Edit. The Edit Call Group dialog box opens.
3 Change the information in the Name or Description fields, select a different View (audience)
for the group, or if needed, edit the Boolean expression text (refer to "Boolean Search" for
detailed information).
4 Click Save.
Delete Call Groups

You can delete a Call Group if you have security rights to do so. Use caution when deleting a Call
Group; once deleted, you cannot restore it unless you recreate the Call Group.
To Delete a Call Group:
box opens.
View), then click Delete.
3 Click Yes to confirm deletion of the group.
4 Click Close.
Restore Saved Call Groups

You can set up a prompt that asks at log on if you want to restore saved Call Groups.
To Set Up the Restore Saved Call Groups Option:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar, select Edit>User Preferences>Prompts.
2 Clear the Skip "restore saved call groups" prompt on startup check box. Doing so tells Call
Logging to prompt you each time you log on with a dialog box asking if you want to restore the
saved Call Groups. If you select the Skip "restore saved call groups" prompt on startup check
box, two options become available:
• Always open ‐ Select this option if you want to bypass the prompt and have Call Logging
always automatically restore the active Call Groups from the last session.
60 HEAT
• Never open ‐ Select this option if you want to bypass the prompt and never have Call
Logging restore Call Groups from the previous session.
3 Click OK.
Save Call Group after Running

Typically, you save Call Groups when you create or edit them. If you run a new Call Group before
saving it, you can still save it afterward.
To Save a New Call Group after Running the Group:
1 Select Group>Save Criteria As. The Unsaved New Group ‐ Save As dialog box opens.
2 Type a name for the new Call Group in the Name field.
3 Type a description in the Description field.
4 In the Save to View section, select an audience for the group. If you click Team, select the
appropriate team from the drop‐down list. All users assigned to that team have access to the
Call Group.
5 Click OK.
Refresh Call Groups

In a networked environment, calls are constantly added and modified. Periodically refreshing the
active Call Group helps ensure the most recent information is available.
To Refresh a Call Group:
• Select Group>Refresh Group.
• Press Ctrl+E.
• Click the Refresh Group button.
Remove Calls from Call Groups

While displaying a group of Call Records in Call Logging, users can temporarily remove the current Call
Record from the active Call Group. This feature does not permanently remove the Call Record from
the database. The process of removing a Call Record from a group is temporary and is used primarily
as a personal call management tool. You might remove the current call from the active Call Group if:
• You want to only display those calls not yet addressed.
• You want to remove calls from the My Hot List group and print only the remaining calls in that
group.
To Remove a Call Record from the Active Call Group:
• Select File>Remove Call from Group.
Note: Refresh the Call Group to add the Call Record back into the active Call
Group (if the Call Record still meets the Call Group criteria).
User Guide 61
Call Groups
Create Toolbar Buttons for Call Groups

You can create a toolbar button for a Call Group so that you can run it directly from the Call Logging
toolbar.
To Create a Toolbar Button for a Call Group:
1 Create and save a Call Group.
box opens.
3 In the list of Call Groups (filtered by View), select the group for which you want to create a
toolbar button.
4 Click Associated Toolbar Button. The Select Image dialog box opens.
5 Select either a Stock or Custom image for the button. A preview of the image is displayed at
the top of the dialog box.
Note: HEAT provides several stock images for your use or you can add your own
custom image. Images are limited to 45 KB. User must possess the appropriate
security right (Custom Image Import) to add and remove custom images.
6 Select Insert a New Toolbar Button.
7 Click OK. The button is placed on the Call Logging toolbar.
62 HEAT
Hot Lists
Hot Lists
A Hot List is a special type of Call Group for which Boolean expressions are not used to pull specific Call
Records according to defined criteria. Instead, the calls in a Hot List are manually added to the group. Any
call can be added, including Call Records with different Customer Types. Hot Lists appear alongside other
Call Groups in the Open Call Group dialog box.
To open a Hot List, select Group>Open Call Group. The red question mark symbol to the left of the group
differentiates the group as a Hot List.
Note: The right to create Hot Lists is granted by your system administrator.
Call Logging includes two types of Hot List Call Groups:
• My Hot List ‐ This Call Group is for the sole use of the user who created the Call Group. Refer to
"Working with My Hot List" for details.
• Hot Lists ‐ This type of Call Group is available to multiple users. Refer to "Working with Hot
Lists" for details.
Working with My Hot List

Every Call Logging user has a personal Hot List called My Hot List, which is available only to that user. You
might use My Hot List as a to‐do list each workday, then purge the list at the end of the day.
Open My Hot List by selecting Group>My Hot List, or click the My Hot List button on the main toolbar.
Note: My Hot List is associated with the user login.
Since the My Hot List group is system‐provided, it has already been created for you. Add Call Records by
selecting Group>Add Call to My Hot List or press Ctrl+M. The currently active Call Record is added to the
My Hot List Call Group (the call information is stored in the database HEATHot Table and recorded with
the owner’s login name).
Working with Hot Lists

You can perform the following tasks for Hot Lists:
• Create Hot Lists
• Add Call Records to Hot Lists
• Remove Calls from Hot Lists
• Delete Hot Lists
Create Hot Lists

You can create a new Hot List for a Personal, Team, or Global audience.
To Create a Hot List:
1 Select Group>Add Call to Hot List>New Hot List. The Create Hot List dialog box opens.
Note: You can also open the Create Hot List dialog box by selecting
Group>Open Call Group, then click the New Hot List button.
User Guide 63
Call Groups
2 In the Name field, type a name for the new Hot List.
3 In the Description field, type a description of the Hot List.
4 Save the Hot List to the Personal, Team, or Global view. If you click Team, select the
appropriate team from the drop‐down list. All users assigned to that team have access to the
Call Group.
5 Click OK. The current call is added to the new Hot List.
Add Call Records to Hot Lists

Adding a Call Record to an existing Hot List links that call with the Hot List, as it is recorded in the
database, as well as with the Call ID number. This is important because it means you can add a Call
Record to many Hot Lists at the same time.
To Add a Call Record to a Hot List:
1 Make sure the Call Record you want to add to the Hot List is the currently active call.
2 Select Group>Add Call to Hot List. A list of existing Hot Lists displays.
3 Click the appropriate Hot List from the list. The currently active call is added to the Hot List.
Remove Calls from Hot Lists

You can permanently remove the active Call Record from the active Hot List. This option is available
only when the Hot List is the currently active Call Group. Use this procedure to remove Call Records
from both Hot Lists and My Hot List.
To Remove a Call Record From a Hot List:
1 Make sure the Call Record you want to remove is the currently active call.
2 Select Group>Remove Call from Hot List. The Remove Call From Hot List dialog box opens.
3 Select the Don't show this dialog box again check box if you do not want to be prompted with
the warning in the future.
4 Click OK. The Call Record is permanently removed from the Hot List.
Delete Hot Lists

You can delete a Hot List if you are given security rights to do so by the HEAT administrator. Use
caution when deleting a Hot List. Once a Hot List is deleted, you cannot restore it unless you recreate
it.
Note: You cannot delete My Hot List.
64 HEAT
Working with Hot Lists
To Delete a Hot List:
1 Select Group>Open Call Group. The Open Call Group dialog box opens.
2 Select the view containing the Hot List you want to delete: Personal, Global, Team, or All.
3 Select the Hot List you want to delete.
4 Click Delete.
5 Click Yes to confirm the deletion. The Hot List is deleted from the list in the Open Call Group
dialog box.
6 Click Close.
Note: This action deletes a Hot List Call Group, not the Call Records contained in
the Hot List.
User Guide 65
Call Groups
66 HEAT
6
Customer Records
Customer Records contain information about customers, work environments, contacts, call histories, and
other details. Call Logging gives you an overview of the records and quick access to specific information. A
Customer Record is made up of four forms (associated with their corresponding records) that have tabs
for easy access. An Attachments tab is also displayed.
• Profile Form ‐ Displays Profile table information (that is, information specific to the customer,
such as name, address, phone number, etc.).
• Contacts Form ‐ Contains the information for the individuals who call from an organization or
department (the organization or department is the customer).
• Configuration Form ‐ Contains data related to other elements of the customer environment
such as asset information, including equipment or software, training information, storeroom
equipment details, inventory, IT settings, or software registrations.
• Call History Form ‐ The contents of the Call History form are not from a single table but present
results from a query of the database. The display contains a list of all existing Call Records for a
selected customer.
• Attachments tab ‐ Use the functionality on this tab to attach files to the customer record (refer
to "Attachments").
You can view a Call Record's associated Customer Record at any time. From the Call Logging menu bar
select Customer>Profile, or click the Customer Profile button.
Customer Records
Profile Form
The Profile form collects detailed contact information about a specific customer and stores it in the Profile
table. The HEAT system administrator can create different Customer Types, each with a unique Profile
form that captures information specific to that Customer Type. The Customer Types in the demonstration
database are: Company, Department, Employee, and Organization. The HEAT administrator can create
additional Customer Types during the customization process.
The following tasks can be performed for the Profile Form:
• Find Profile Records
• Add Profile Records
• Add Profile Records On the Fly
• Edit Profile Records
• Delete Profile Records
Find Profile Records

There are several ways to find a Profile record in Call Logging.
To Find a Profile Record, do one of the following:
• From the main Call Logging menu bar, select Customer>Search. The Profile Search dialog
box opens, in which you can create a Boolean expression to find the Profile record(s). Refer
to "Search Using the Find Command" for details.
• From the main Customer Profile menu bar (select Customer>Profile), select Record>Find.
The Profile Search dialog box opens, in which you can create a Boolean expression to find
the Profile record(s). Refer to "Search Using the Find Command" for details.
• From the main Customer Profile toolbar (select Customer>Profile), click the Find Record
button. The Profile Search dialog box opens, in which you can create a Boolean expression to
find the Profile record(s). Refer to "Search Using the Find Command" for details.
• You can launch a Simple Search by right clicking in any Subset field and selecting Simple
Search from the shortcut menu, or by selecting Group>Simple Search.
Add Profile Records

You can create a new customer Profile by following the procedure below.
Note: The preferred method for adding multiple, new Profile records is to do so
through Table Maintenance.
To Add a New Customer Profile Record:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar, select Customer>Profile or click the Customer Profile
button. The Profile Record (Customer Record) for the current Call Record displays.
2 Create a new Customer Profile Record in one of the following ways:
• Click the Create Customer Record button in the toolbar
• Select File>New Customer Record.
68 HEAT
Profile Form
3 The Customer Type dialog box opens. The following Customer Types are predefined in the
HEAT demo data:
• Company ‐ Company profile information
• Department ‐ Internal departments for the Help Desk
• Employee ‐ Employee profile information
• Equipment ‐ Equipment profile information
• Facility ‐ Facility profile information
4 When you choose the Customer Type, the cursor defaults to the first field in the Subset. Type
the information to complete the form. If the HEAT administrator enabled you to upload photos
or images to the record:
• Right‐click the photo or image placeholder icon in the Subset form. For example, for an
Employee profile, you might right‐click the employee badge icon in the upper left corner of
the Subset form.
• Either upload the image (select Image>Upload Image) or paste in the image (select
Image>Paste).
Note: If upload (and if this function has been enabled by the administrator), the
original image will also become an attachment.
5 Click the Save button.
Add Profile Records On the Fly

If you are in the middle of creating a new Call Record and find that you need to add information to
the Profile table, you can do it on the fly.
To Add a New Profile Record On the Fly:
1 Click the New Call Record button. A blank Call Record displays.
Note: The new Call Record defaults to the Customer Type of the last active Call
Record. If you need to change the Customer Type, select File>Customer Type.
The Customer Type dialog box opens. Select the appropriate Customer Type.
Click OK and a blank Profile record bearing that Customer Type displays.
2 Your cursor defaults to the Subset. Press F9. The Validate from Profile dialog box opens.
3 Click New. A blank Profile form displays. Type the information to complete the form. If the
HEAT administrator enabled you to upload photos or images to the record:
a) Right‐click the photo or image placeholder icon in the Subset form. For example, for an
Employee profile, you might right‐click the employee badge icon in the upper left corner of
the Subset form.
b) Either upload the image (select Image>Upload Image) or paste in the image (select
Image>Paste).
Note: If upload (and if this function has been enabled by the administrator), the
original image will also become an attachment.
User Guide 69
Customer Records
Edit Profile Records

When Profile information changes, you can update it if you have the rights required to do so.
To Edit a Profile Record:
1 Find the Profile record you want to edit.
2 If the grid view opens, click the Form View button.
3 Edit the information.
4 On the toolbar, click the Save button.
5 Select File>Close. The Customer Record closes and returns you to the Call Record.
Delete Profile Records

You can delete a Profile if you have the rights required to do so.
IMPORTANT: Always get permission from your system administrator before
deleting. When you delete a Profile record, the information from that Profile
record remains in the Subsets of the existing Call Records; however, if you
attempt to re‐validate Subset information on an open Call Record, or try and
reopen a Call Record, there is no Profile from which the Subset can draw the
information. This could cause problems when you need to run a report.
To Delete a Profile Record:
1 Select Group>Close Call Group to close all open Call Groups.
2 Click the Customer Profile button. The Customer Profile record displays.
3 Select File>Customer Type. The Customer Type dialog box opens.
4 Double‐click the Customer Type of the record you want to delete. The Customer grid view
opens.
5 Click to highlight the specific Profile you want to delete.
6 Select Record>Delete.
8 On the toolbar, click the Save button.
9 Select File>Close. The Customer Record closes and returns to the Call Record.
70 HEAT
Contacts Form
Contacts Form
The Contacts form stores the information for each contact you might have with a particular company or
department. When you are in the Customer Profile record, click the Contacts tab and the contacts display,
listed in grid view. You can also access the Contacts by selecting Customer>Contacts from the Call Logging
menu bar or by clicking the View Contacts button.
Note: The HEAT system administrator associates Contact forms with Customer
Types in the Administrator module. If the Customer Type is not associated with
a Contacts form, no contact information is available for that Customer Type
(and the Contacts tab will not appear in the Customer window).
Add Contact Records

As you establish more contacts at various companies and with other departments, follow this
procedure to add them to the Customer Record.
To Add a Contact Record:
1 From within a Call Record in the Call Logging main window, select Customer>Contacts from
the Call Logging menu bar or click the View Contacts button. The Contacts records for the
customer display in grid view.
2 Select Record>New or click the New Entry button (at the bottom left, next to the Grid/Form
View button). A new Contact Record displays. The Customer or Department ID from the Call
Record is already in the ID field.
3 Type the remaining information.
Note: You are required to have a value for the ID field and the name field, or the
new Contact Record does not save.
4 Click the Save button (at the bottom left).
5 Select File>Close. The Customer window closes and returns you to the Call Record.
Configuration Form
The Configuration form provides a way to capture data related to other elements of the customer
environment. A Configuration Record can contain asset information, including equipment or software. In
addition, you can use Configuration Records to track various Configuration Types, such as training,
storeroom equipment, inventory, IT settings, or software registrations. Each Configuration Type has a
unique form containing fields pertinent to that specific item. You can associate multiple Configuration
Types to a single Customer Record.
The following Configuration tasks can be performed:
• Add Configuration Record
• Edit Configuration Records
• Delete Configuration Records
User Guide 71
Customer Records
Add Configuration Record

Follow the steps below to add a new Configuration Record for a customer.
To Add a Configuration Record:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar, select Customer>Configuration or click the Customer
Configuration button. The Configuration records for the customer display in grid view.
Note: You can double‐click an entry to display the form for that record.
2 Select Record>New or click the New Entry button (at the bottom left, next to the Grid/Form
View button). The Configuration Type dialog box opens.
3 Double‐click a Configuration Type and the associated form displays. Type the information to
complete the form.
4 If the HEAT administrator enabled you to upload photos or images to the record:
a) Right‐click the photo or image placeholder icon in the Subset form. For example, for an
Equipment record, you might right‐click the equipment icon in the upper left corner of the
Subset form.
b) Either upload the image (select Image>Upload Image) or paste in the image (select
Image>Paste). If you upload the image (and if the attachment function has been enabled by
the administrator), the original image will also become an attachment.
Edit Configuration Records

You can change Configuration Records as needed.
To Edit a Configuration Record:
2 Double‐click the record to be edited. The Configuration form for that record displays.
3 Edit the form as needed.
Delete Configuration Records

You can delete a Configuration Record.
To Delete a Configuration Record:
2 Highlight the Configuration Record you want to delete.
3 Select Record>Delete.
72 HEAT
Call History Form
5 On the toolbar, click the Save button (at the bottom left).
Call History Form

The content of the Call History form does not actually reside in a discrete database table but is the result
of a database query. The form contains a list of all existing Call Records for the active customer.
To Access a Customer’s Call History:
• In the Call Logging window, either click the Caller History button on the Call Logging toolbar
or from the menu, select Customer>Call History. The Call History displays (in grid view) a
record of all the calls for the customer associated with the currently active Call Record.
Double‐click an entry to display the Call Record in the Call Logging window.
• In the Customer window, click the Call History tab. The Call History displays (in grid view) a
record of all the calls for the currently active customer. Double‐click an entry to display the
Call Record in the Call Logging window.
User Guide 73
Customer Records
74 HEAT
7
Customer Groups
Customer Groups allow you to group or organize Customer Records according to similarities or some
other desirable criteria. For example, you can create a Customer Group to cluster Customer Records for
customers living in Colorado. Creating a group allows you to search for records very quickly. You can also
run AutoTasks against groups.
HEAT provides several predefined Customer Groups. You can use these Customer Groups, modify them, or
create your own. A single Customer Record can belong to multiple groups, and a group may include one
or more Customer Records. A Customer Group is dynamic and changes with Customer Records as they are
altered. The active Customer Group name and Customer Record count appear in the title bar at the top of
the window.
For Customer Group procedures, refer to:
• Create Customer Groups
• Working with Customer Groups
Customer Groups
Create Customer Groups

Define the criteria for a Customer Group using one of the following:
• Simple Search ‐ One expression or single criterion; for example, all customers living in Colorado;
expression is State = Colorado.
• Boolean Search ‐ Multiple expressions or sets of criteria; for example, Gold customers living in
Colorado: the expressions are SLA = Gold AND State = Colorado.
You can designate an audience for a Customer Group by selecting a View for the Customer Group. You can
create a toolbar button for each Customer Group and place them on your toolbars for easy access. You
create toolbar buttons using the Open Customer Groups dialog box.
Simple Search
You can create a Customer Group using a Simple Search, which is a query of one expression or single
criterion; for example, all open customers living in Colorado: the expression is State = Colorado.
Note: If you want to search based on multiple criteria, you must use a Boolean
Search.
To run a Simple Search, either select your query from a menu list of predefined queries your system
administrator has already set up or right‐click a field on the form.
To Create a Customer Group Using a Simple Search:
1 Open the Customer window by clicking the Customer Profile button on the Call Logging
toolbar.
2 Do one of the following:
• From the Group menu, select Simple Search. From the submenu, select a field to search. The
Simple Search for Field opens for the field you selected.
• To perform a simple search on a field in a Customer Record, place the insertion point in the
field and right‐click (or, from the menu, select Group>Simple Search>Current Field). Select
Simple Search from the short‐cut menu. The Simple Search for Field dialog box opens, with
the Value field populated by the contents of the field you selected.
Note: If you want to perform a simple search for a memo or binary field (such
as Notes), first select the text you want to use for the search, then right‐click
and select Simple Search. The Value field is populated with the selected text.
3 In the Operator drop‐down list, select a Logical Operator (for example, =).
76 HEAT
Create Customer Groups
4 If you selected or right‐clicked a populated field to begin the simple search (or selected text in
a field), the Value field contains the text from the field. Otherwise, type a value or click Browse
to select a value for the search. Clicking the Browse button opens the Validate from dialog
box, from which you can select a valid value.
Note: If the Validate from dialog box contains a long list of values, you can use
the Quick Search feature to narrow the list. Type the first few characters of the
data for which you are searching and select Search. You can also use the
Boolean Search button to define the data you are searching for (refer to
"Boolean Search"). The Show All button can be used to display all of the
validation table values.
5 Select the Profile Type.
6 Click Run to begin the search. All records that match your criteria are displayed in the
Customer window in grid view.
7 To save the search results as a Group, select Group>Save Criteria As. The Unsaved New Group
‐ Save As dialog box opens.
8 Type a name and description (optional).
9 In the Save to View section, select a View (audience) for your Customer Group. If you click
Team, select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list. All users assigned to that team
have access to the Customer Group.
10 Click OK.
Boolean Search
You can create a Customer Group using a Boolean Search, which is a query of multiple expressions or
sets of criteria; for example, all Gold customers living in Colorado: the expressions are SLA = Gold
AND State = Colorado.
To Create a Customer Group Using a Boolean Expression:
toolbar.
2 From the Customer Profile menu bar, select Group>New Customer Group. The New Customer
Group dialog box opens.
User Guide 77
Customer Groups
3 Type a name and description for your new Customer Group.
4 In the Save to View section, select a View (audience) for your Customer Group. If you click
Team, select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list. All users assigned to that team
have access to the Customer Group.
5 In the Table Name drop‐down list, select the table containing the field you want to use in your
expression. When you select one of the tables, the available fields for that specific table
appear in the Field list.
Note: If you select a Compound table (Config table), you can also choose a
Table Type. If you choose a Compound table, you can select the Fields from all
Table Types check box to include every instance of a specific field from all of the
available table types in your search criteria. You can also select @Functions to
use in the expression. Only @Functions that are pertinent to Customer Records
and Customer Groups are available.
6 In the Field list, double‐click a field to add it to the Boolean Expression (for example, SLA).
7 In the Operators list, double‐click an operator to add it to the Boolean Expression (for
example, =).
8 Click Browse Field Data. The Validate from dialog box opens for the field you selected. All
available items appear in grid view. Select a value, then click OK (for example, Gold).
9 Continue to add expressions:
78 HEAT
Working with Customer Groups
Note: To create a new Customer Group designed with a complex Boolean
expression, save time by opening a similar, existing Customer Group, modifying
the expression, then performing a Save As under the new group name. Also, the
group can be saved to another view.
10 To define a sorting order for the Customer Group, click the Order By button to open the Order
By dialog box. Then, select the field(s) by which you want to sort the group; for example, if you
select CallID, all records in the group are listed in ascending or descending order (you specify)
by their Call ID numbers. When finished, click OK.
Note: You need to refresh the group before sorting takes effect. To do this, click
Save and Run or manually refresh the group.
11 Click the Check button to verify that your expression text is correct.
12 When you are satisfied with the expression text you have defined, click the Run button. All
Customer Records that match your criteria are displayed in the Call Logging main window
(either in grid view or form view).
• To save the Customer Group without running the search, click Save.
• To save the Customer Group and run the search, click Save and Run.

You can perform the following tasks for Customer Groups:
• Open Customer Groups
• Edit Customer Groups
• Delete Customer Groups
• Create Toolbar Buttons for Customer Groups
You can also work with Customer Groups on the Customer Group tab in the InfoCenter. Customer Groups
can be added to the InfoCenter Favorites tab for quick access. Refer to "InfoCenter" for details.
Open Customer Groups

You can open a Customer Group from the list of Personal, Team, or Global Customer Groups.
To Open a Customer Group:
toolbar.
2 From the Customer Profile menu bar, select Group>Open Customer Group. The Open
Customer Group dialog box opens.
User Guide 79
Customer Groups
3 In the View section, filter the list by selecting Personal, Team, Global, or All.
4 Select a Customer Group in the list, then click Open. The Customer Group opens in the
Customer window.
Note: You can also open a Customer Group by pressing Ctrl+O when in the
Customer window.
Edit Customer Groups

You can edit the criteria defining a Customer Group, changing data in any field of the dialog box or
creating a new Boolean search to formulate a new Customer Group.
To Edit a Customer Group:
toolbar.
View), then click Edit. The Edit Customer Group dialog box opens.
4 Change the information in the Name or Description fields, select a different View (audience)
for the group, or if needed, edit the Boolean expression text.
5 Click Save.
Delete Customer Groups

You can delete a Customer Group if you have security rights to do so. Use caution when deleting a
Customer Group; once deleted, you cannot restore it unless you recreate the Customer Group.
To Delete a Customer Group:
toolbar.
80 HEAT
View), then click Delete.
4 Click Yes to confirm deletion of the group.
5 Click Close.
Create Toolbar Buttons for Customer Groups

You can create a toolbar button for a Customer Group so that you can run it directly from the
Customer Profile toolbar.
To Create a Toolbar Button for a Customer Group:
1 Create and save a Customer Group.
3 In the list of Customer Groups (filtered by View), select the group for which you want to create
a toolbar button.
4 Click the Associated Toolbar Button button. The Select Image dialog box opens.
7 Click OK. The button is placed on the Customer Profile toolbar.
User Guide 81
Customer Groups
82 HEAT
8
Attachments
You can attach a wide variety of files and applications to the database, Customer Records, and individual
Call Records. Attachments provide additional information pertinent to a Customer Record or Call Record,
including information found in different file formats, executables containing memos from customers, time
sheets from assignees, diagrams of a customer installation, video to assist with maintenance, etc.
HEAT provides three types of attachments:
• Call Record attachments ‐ Call Record attachments link files or applications to a single Call
Record, which can only be viewed from that Call Record. Click the Attachments tab to view the
attachments. Refer to "Record Attachments" for details about adding, editing, viewing, and
removing attachments.
• Customer attachments ‐ Often called Profile attachments, Customer attachments link files or
applications to a Customer Profile record. Click the Attachments tab to view the attachments.
You can access Profile attachments from the Call Logging window through Customer>Profile
Attachments. Refer to "Record Attachments" for details about adding, editing, viewing, and
removing attachments.
• Global attachments ‐ Global attachments link files or applications to the entire HEAT database,
which can be viewed at any time while in Call Logging. They may contain background
information such as schedules, release notes, fax documents, internal policies, etc. Use global
attachments to place commonly‐used utilities within easy reach of everyone who uses Call
Logging. Refer to "Global Attachments".
You can copy attachments to a central location (usually a shared location) specified by your system
administrator. HEAT then points to the copy in the shared location rather than the original file.
Use the Attachments Toolbar to add, edit, and delete attachments or click the Attachments tab, then
right‐click to display the shortcut menu.
Attachments
Record Attachments
You can perform the following Attachment procedures for Call Records and Customer (Profile) Records:
• Add Attachments to Records
• View Record Attachments
• Edit Attachments
• Remove Attachments
Add Attachments to Records

You can add attachments to Call Records and Customer Records using the Attachments Toolbar
or click the Attachments tab.
To Add an Attachment to a Record:
1 Open a Call Record or Customer Record. Do one of the following:
• Click the Add Attachment button on the Attachments toolbar. The Enter New Attachment
Information for Call ID dialog box opens.
• Click the Attachments tab. Right‐click, then click Add Attachment from the shortcut menu.
The Enter New Attachment Information for Call ID dialog box opens.
2 In the Description field, type a description (which will appear on an attachment button in the
Attachments toolbar).
3 Click Browse to browse to the location of the file, or type a file name or URL in the File Name
field.
4 To copy the attachment to the central location specified by your system administrator, select
the Copy Attachment check box.
5 Click OK. The attachment is now listed on the Attachments tab.
View Record Attachments
To View an Attachment:
1 Click the Attachments tab.
2 Right‐click the attachment, then click View Attachment from the shortcut menu, or simply
double‐click the attachment.
84 HEAT
Global Attachments
Edit Attachments
You can edit the file names and paths for attachments using the Attachments toolbar or click the
Attachments tab.
To Edit an Attachment:
• Click the Edit Attachment button on the Attachments toolbar. The Edit Attachment
Information for Call ID dialog box opens. If there is more than one attachment for the
record, the Select Attachment to Edit dialog box opens. Highlight an attachment, then click
Select.
• Click the Attachments tab. Right‐click the attachment, then click Edit from the shortcut
menu. The Edit Attachment Information for Call ID dialog box opens.
2 Edit the Description field, the path (or URL) and file name of the file, or select the Copy
Attachment check box.
3 Click OK.
4 Select File> Save Call Record.
Remove Attachments
If you no longer need an attached file, you can remove it from the record.
To Remove an Attachment:
• Click the Remove Attachment button on the Attachments toolbar. If there is more than one
attachment for the record, the Select Attachment to Edit dialog box opens. Select an
attachment, then click Remove.
• Click the Attachments tab. Right‐click the attachment, then click Remove from the shortcut
menu.
2 Click Yes to confirm the removal of the attachment.
Global Attachments
You can perform the following tasks for Global attachments:
• Add Global Attachments
• View Global Attachments
• Edit Global Attachments
• Remove Global Attachments
Add Global Attachments

You can add Global attachments using the Attachments toolbar.
To Add a Global Attachment:
1 Click the Global Attachments button on the Attachments Toolbar. The Global Attachments
dialog box opens.
2 Click Add. The Enter New Attachment Information for Call ID dialog box opens.
User Guide 85
Attachments
3 In the Description field, type a description (which will appear next to the attachment icon in
the Global Attachments dialog box).
4 Click Browse to browse to the location of the file, or type a file name or URL in the File Name
field.
5 To copy the attachment to the central location specified by your system administrator, select
the Copy Attachment check box.
6 Click OK. Notice the attachment is now listed in the Global Attachments dialog box.
7 Click Exit.
View Global Attachments

Global attachments can be viewed in the Global Attachments dialog box.
To View an Attachment:
1 Click the Global Attachments button on the Attachments toolbar. The Global Attachments
dialog box opens, listing all Global attachments.
2 Select the attachment you want to see, then click View.
Edit Global Attachments

You can edit Global attachments using the Attachments toolbar.
To Edit a Global Attachment:
dialog box opens.
2 Select the attachment you want to modify, then click Edit. The Enter New Attachment
Information for Call ID dialog box opens.
3 Edit the Description and File Name fields as needed.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Exit.
Remove Global Attachments

If you no longer need a Global attachment, you can remove it.
To Remove an Attachment:
dialog box opens.
2 Select the attachment you want to delete, then click Remove.
3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the attachment. The attachment is removed from the list in
the Global Attachments dialog box.
4 Click Exit.
86 HEAT
9
Searching
The ability to efficiently handle business relies on quick retrieval of critical information. Call Logging
supplies several ways to find information housed in the database; these methods range from very simple
searches to complex searches based on Boolean expressions.
Search methods include:
• Quick Search ‐ You can Quick Search any validated Call Record field. Quick searching allows you
to type any alphanumeric combination and pull matching values from the database. For
example, you could quick search the Call Type field for the value s. The Quick Search would then
return all records with Call Types that begin with the letter s (for example, software).
• Simple Search ‐ A Simple Search expedites locating Call Records or Customer Records with a
single common feature, such as Company or Tracker. The system administrator determines the
group of criteria from which you can select your simple search condition.
• Search Using the Find Command ‐ The Find command is located in several secondary windows
throughout Call Logging, under the Record menu option (it cannot be accessed from the menu
bar in the main Call Logging window). The Customer Profile window, Contacts, Table
Maintenance, and Asset Configuration windows all have a Record option in the menu bar.
• Search by Browsing ‐ You can locate a specific Call Record by browsing through the list of Call
IDs for the open Call Group.
• Search by Call ID ‐ You can open a specific Call Record by its Call ID number using the Go to Call
ID function.
• Boolean Search ‐ A Boolean search uses expressions comprising multiple conditions linked by a
Logical Operator. These expressions define the criteria by which the database is searched.
Unlike a simple search, you can set as much criteria as you need to find very specific values. For
example, you can find a group of Call Records closed for more than a month, whose priorities
were greater than 3.
• Search Internet ‐ Use the Web tab in Call Logging to perform call‐related Internet searches.
• First Level Support (FLS) and HEAT Plus Knowledge (HPK) ‐ First Level Support is the knowledge
base packaged with HEAT. A knowledge base is a tool for retaining the answers found as
employees work issues. They can post solutions to the knowledge base, and those solutions
remain available to all employees. These solutions can be posted back into Call Logging after
you have made a successful search of the knowledge base. HEAT Plus Knowledge is a Web‐
based application that uses hierarchical content collections to store, author, and share
knowledge. Integrating Call Logging with HEAT Plus Knowledge allows for searching and
automatically populating knowledge entries.
Searching
Quick Search
If you need to find a Call or Customer Record based on a single criterion, you can perform a Quick Search.
The Quick Search pulls all of the values matching that criterion, in effect giving you a short list of values
from which to select.
To Perform a Quick Search:
1 In a Call or Customer Record, place your insertion point in a validated field (for example, the
Last Name field), and right‐click.
2 Select Validate Field from the short‐cut menu. The Validate from dialog box opens for the field
you are validating.
3 In the Quick Search field at the bottom of the dialog box, type the first few character(s) of the
data for which you are quick searching (for example, the first letter of the last name for which
you are searching).
Note: Depending upon the value for which you are searching, you can type any
logical alphanumeric combination. For example, if you are searching for a
phone number whose area code begins with 3, you might type (3.
4 Click Search. A list of all possible values that matches the characters you typed appears in the
Validate from dialog box.
5 Double‐click your selection and it automatically populates the record field.
Note: For Call Records, if you are validating the Call Type field, and the Call Type
you choose has an associated Detail form, that Detail form will also be
populated with your selection.
Simple Search
A simple search looks for all Call or Customer Records with a common feature, such as Company or
Tracker. Your HEAT system administrator determines the available search fields. You can create a Call
Group or Customer Group to search for a value from a single field using Simple Search; for example, you
can search for all Call Records having the word printer as part of the call description.
• Refer to Call Groups "Simple Search" for Call Records search details and procedure.
• Refer to Customer Groups "Simple Search" for Customer Records search details and procedure.
88 HEAT
Search Using the Find Command
Search Using the Find Command

The Find command is located in the Customer Profile window, Contacts, Table Maintenance, and Asset
Configuration windows under the Record menu bar option.
Using this search option, you can also create a Boolean Search to find customer Profile records from one
Profile table field, then sort the records according to a sort order criterion you specify. For example, you
could search for all Profile records for companies in Denver, then sort them by SLA Class.
To Find a Customer Profile Record:
1 From the main Call Logging window, select Customer>Profile. The current customer Profile
record displays.
Note: You can click any of the tabs at the top of the window to perform
searches in the Configuration, Contacts, or Call History records associated with
the currently active customer.
2 Select Record>Find. The Profile Search dialog box opens (or, if you clicked from one of the
other tabs, the dialog box would reflect the tab name, such as Config Search).
3 In the Customer Type drop‐down list, select a Customer Type.
4 In the Field list, select the field to search.
5 In the Operator list, select a Logical Operator.
6 In the Value field, either type a value or click Browse to select a value. If you click Browse, the
Browse Data dialog box opens. Select a value from the list and click Select.
7 To search this criteria, click Search.
8 To enhance your search criteria click the More button. Additional functionality opens in the
Profile Search dialog box. Click Add. The search criteria you have already defined appears in
the Condition List section, and the AND and OR buttons are activated.
User Guide 89
Searching
9 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to create another condition, then click Add to add that criteria to the
Condition List section.
10 Click Search.
Search by Browsing
You can browse through the list of Call IDs for the open Call Group to locate a specific Call Record.
You can also use the Call Browse function on the Call Browse tab in the InfoCenter; refer to "Call Browse"
for details.
To Search by Browsing:
1 From the Group menu, select Call Record Browse. The Call Record Browse dialog box opens,
listing all Call Records (sorted by Call ID) for the currently open Call Group.
2 Scroll through the list of Call Records, or re‐sort the list by clicking any column header, then
click to highlight a Call Record.
• To display the highlighted Call Record in the Call Logging window, do one of the following:
» Select the Synchronize Displays check box. The selected Call Record displays, but Call
Logging returns to the prior active Call Record when you click Close.
» Double‐click a Call Record in the list. The Call Record Browse dialog box closes and the
double‐clicked Call Record displays.
» With a Call Record selected, click the Go To Call button.
• To print the selected Call Record, click the Page Setup button to format the record, then click
the Print button.
• To export a Call Record, refer to "Export Call Records".
3 Click Close to exit the dialog box.
Search by Call ID
You can quickly search out a Call Record using the Go To Call ID function.
To Perform a Search Using the Go To Call ID Command:
1 From the main Call Logging menu, select File>Go To Call ID. The Go To Call ID dialog box
opens.
2 In the Call ID field, type the Call ID you are looking for.
3 Click OK. The Call Record you selected displays in the main Call Logging window.
90 HEAT
Boolean Search
Boolean Search
All searches are designed to locate information based on specific criteria. Boolean searching is a method
developed primarily for a computer‐generated search of a database. This type of search also locates
information based on multiple sets of criteria. The criteria is defined in terms of an expression, which
employs values and/or symbols to find the data meeting the conditions you set up in the expression. In a
Boolean search, these expressions can compare, filter, or define relationships using a Logical Operator.
These operators include: AND, OR, >, <, >=, <=, <>,=, like, is empty, is not empty, is null, is not null.
Boolean searches are used to search for Call Records or Customer Records when creating Call Groups and
Customer Groups:
• Refer to Call Groups "Boolean Search" for Call Records search details and procedure.
• Refer to Customer Groups "Boolean Search" for Customer Records search details and
procedure.
Logical Operator
The table below lists the operators found in the HEAT search functions and provides an example.
Logical Operator Description Example
AND Connect conditions with AND to To find open Call Records with Hardware as

have Call Logging return Call the Call Type and JSmith as the tracker:
Records containing all of the {CallLog.CallStatus} = 'Open' AND
specified values. {CallLog.CallType} =' Hardware' AND
{CallLog.Tracker} = 'JSmith'
OR Connect conditions with OR to To find calls made about either Lotus 1‐2‐3
have Call Logging return Call issues or Microsoft Excel issues:
Records containing any of the {CallLog.CallType} = 'Excel' OR
specified values. {CallLog.CallType} = 'Lotus 123'
Less Than (<) The equivalency operators To find all Call Records with a Call Type of

Less Than or Equal define a comparative Purchase Order resolved on or before 12/31/
To (<=) relationship of values. 08:
Greater Than (>) {CallLog.CallType} = 'Purchase Order' AND
Greater Than or {CallLog.CallStatus} = 'Solved' AND
Equal To (>=) {CallLog.ClosedDate} <= '2008‐12‐31'
Equal To (=) To pull all Call Records with a Call Type of
Not Equal To (<>) Purchase Order resolved on or after 12/31/
08:
{CallLog.CallType} = 'Purchase Order' AND
{CallLog.CallStatus} = 'Solved' AND
{CallLog.ClosedDate} >= '2008‐12‐31'
To search for data with a relationship to all
but one of the possible associated values,
such as a list of all Call Records that are not
closed, use the Not Equal To operator (<>) to
exclude that value; in this case, exclude the
closed Call Status value (thereby including all
the rest):
{CallLog.CallStatus} <> 'Closed'
User Guide 91
Searching
Logical Operator Description Example
like Use this operator to find text To find a closed Call Record for which you

within a Call Record. have forgotten the customer’s name, but
recall that the Call Description contained the
word training, use the like operator to find
Call Records that include training in the Call
Description:
{CallLog.CallDesc} like '%training%'
Note: The % is used as a wildcard, which
replaces any text that may precede or follow
the word “training.”
is empty Use this operator to find empty To find all Call Records with an empty

fields. Priority field:
{CallLog.Priority} is empty
is not empty Use this operator to find fields To find all Call Records with a value in the

containing a value. SLA field:
{CallLog.CallStatus} is not empty
is null Use this operator to search for To find all clients who did not pay tax on

field values equal to zero. their orders (maybe all of your out‐of‐state
clients):
{Detail.TaxCost} is null
is not null Use this operator to search for To find all clients who did pay tax on their

field values that are not equal to orders (maybe all of your in‐state clients):
zero. {Detail.TaxCost} is not null
+, ‐, *, and / Addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division.
( ) Parenthesis designating order of
operations.
@Functions
When creating a Boolean expression, you might need to use @Functions to capture constantly
changing variables. Doing so greatly simplifies Group creation by eliminating the need to
constantly redefine new groups.
Example:
If you want to retrieve all calls within a date range that includes the current date, you could use
an @Function in place of the specific current date. Instead of the following expression, which
would pull all Call Records received between the last day of 2009 and the current date of June 12,
2010:
{CallLog.RecvdDate} >= '2009‐12‐31' AND
{CallLog.RecvdDate} <= '2010‐06‐12
You could create the following expression, which results in finding all Call Records received
between the last day of 2009 and the current date, expressed by an @function:
{CallLog.RecvdDate} >= '2009‐12‐31' AND
{CallLog.RecvdDate} <= @Date()
92 HEAT
Search Internet
Search Internet
You can perform an Internet search within a Call Record in Call Logging, with the results displayed on the
Web tab. Multiple searches produce multiple tabs on the Web page. You can scroll through the tabs on
the Web page using the left and right arrows to the right of the tabs (which display when the number of
tabs exceeds the available display space). Search results are not retained per Call Record ‐ the Web tab
search results display in all Call Records within the current group.
Refer to the Set User Preferences "General Tab" topic for details on specifying the search engine default,
adding, editing, and removing search engines.
There are two ways to search: within a Call Record form or using a toolbar button.
To Search the Internet within a Call Logging Form:
• On the Subset, Call Log, Detail, Assignment, or Journal form, right‐click a field, and select Search
Internet. The search engine opens on the Web tab.
» If the field you right‐click is populated, that value becomes the search word (except memo
fields: if you do not select a word or phrase, the Internet search field will be empty), or you
can select a word or phrase in the field to be the search value.
» If the field you right‐click is empty, the Internet search field will also be empty.
To Search the Internet using a Toolbar Button:
1 Click Edit>Toolbar>Customize (or click drop‐down arrow at right end of main toolbar, then
click Customize). The Customize dialog box opens.
2 Click the Commands tab.
3 Click the Solution category, then drag the Search in Internet button (and field) into the desired
position on the Call Logging main toolbar.
4 To perform an Internet search, type the search word/phrase in the Search in Internet field,
then press the Enter key. The search engine opens on the Web tab.
• The Search in Internet field retains a history of Internet searches performed in this field (not
the right‐click searches), and only for the current session.
• Click the drop‐down arrow in the Search in Internet field to view and select from the history
of searches.
HEAT Plus Knowledge (HPK)

HEAT Plus Knowledge is the advanced, web‐based, knowledge base solution that uses hierarchical content
collections to store, author, and share knowledge. When integrated with HEAT Call Logging and HEAT Self
Service, HPK can be used to manage and share knowledge within your support organization and with the
customers your organization supports. Advanced search features in HEAT Plus Knowledge expedite the
process of finding answers to questions and solving problems, then facilitates posting solutions and
automatically populating knowledge entries.
HEAT Plus Knowledge Components

• HEAT Knowledge Connector ‐ The tool used for the integration between Call Logging and
HPK; The HPK Knowledge Service opens within the Knowledge Connector. To use HPK, Call
Logging must be directed to the location of the knowledge base executable
(KBConnector.exe) in User Preferences. Refer to "Path Preferences" for details.
• Knowledge Service ‐ The primary HPK component, installed on the server.
User Guide 93
Searching
• HEAT Plus Knowledge Administration ‐ The interface used to manage HPK users and security
as well as create empty content collections. Launched by clicking a button from the HPK
navigation bar, Administration access is limited to users with the appropriate security rights.
• Self Service ‐ The HPK user interface for the users supported by your organization and
accessible by users through an Internet browser.
First Level Support (FLS)

First Level Support uses knowledge bases you create, or import from a third‐party vendor, to share
information. In knowledge bases, users can browse through topics to find answers to a problem, post
solutions to a problem, or provide supporting documentation. FLS is integrated with Call Logging so you
can easily transfer text from an FLS topic directly into a Call Logging field and vice versa.
Example:
While working in Call Logging, you can search FLS to look for a solution to the issue of the current Call
Record. When you find the solution, you can transfer the solution text directly to the Call Record.
The knowledge bases in FLS are called knowledge trees. Like an outline, knowledge trees are arranged in a
hierarchical format of topics and subtopics, called nodes and child nodes (or subnodes). You can browse
FLS trees by clicking the nodes, or you can search for keywords and phrases.
Note: For further information and instructions on setting up and using FLS,
refer to the First Level Support online help.
94 HEAT
10
InfoCenter
The InfoCenter provides quick access/navigation to Call Logging information and functionality. Located to
the left of the Call Record, the InfoCenter is comprised of two panels containing the following tabbed
components:
• HEATBoard ‐ The HEATBoard is an information source,
where users can post and read important notices
pertaining to specific call issues or company‐related
events such as staff meetings, work process changes, or
facility issues.
• Call Map ‐ The Call Map is an expandable and collapsible
summary view of the currently‐active Call Record.
Double‐click any item in the view tree to navigate to the
corresponding Call Logging form or window.
• Favorites ‐ Provides quick access to the Call Records, Call
or Customer Groups, AutoTasks, files, or Internet links
you frequently use.
• Call Browse ‐ Lists the Call Records for the currently‐active
Call Group.
• AutoTasks ‐ Provides the same list of AutoTasks, and some
of the same functionality, as the Manage AutoTasks
dialog box.
• Customer Groups ‐ Provides the same list of Customer
Groups, and some of the same functionality, as the Open
Customer Group dialog box.
• Call Groups ‐ Provides the same list of Call Groups, and
some of the same functionality, as the Open Call Group
dialog box.
InfoCenter
Security and Rights

The HEAT administrator sets up specific rights for each user, which includes rights related to the
InfoCenter:
• HEATBoard rights allow a user access to the HEATBoard. Additional rights such as adding,
editing, deleting, and autoclosing are granted at the discretion of the HEAT administrator.
• Call Map rights include access to the Call Map as well as options to change the User
Preferences settings.
• Call and Customer Groups InfoCenter rights are the same as those related to the Open Call
Group and Open Customer Group dialog boxes, including the ability to see groups in
Personal, Team, All Teams, and Global Views
• AutoTasks InfoCenter rights are the same as those for the Manage AutoTasks dialog box,
including the ability to see AutoTasks in Personal, Team, All Teams, and Global Views.
• Favorites rights include access the Favorites tab as well as add, edit, and delete options.
Navigate the InfoCenter

The InfoCenter can be moved to various locations in the Call Logging window (top, bottom, left,
or right). One or both of the panels can be hidden, moved, or undocked and left floating as stand‐
alone windows. Individual tabs can be closed, or removed from the panel and docked elsewhere
or left floating as stand‐alone windows. The tabs can also be moved from one panel to the other.
To Navigate the InfoCenter:
• To view any InfoCenter component, click the corresponding tab.
• Click and drag the right edge of the InfoCenter to change the width; adjust the height of
each panel by clicking and dragging the border between panels.
• Click the Close icon (x) to close each InfoCenter tab (which can be reopened from the View
menu). Or right‐click the component header and click Hide.
• Click the Auto Hide icon (push pin next to the close icon) to hide each InfoCenter panel (all
components in that panel will be hidden), leaving two sets of tabs ‐ one set for the upper
panel and one for the lower. Move your mouse over each tab to reopen that tab to see
needed information; move your mouse away from the tab to re‐hide the panel. Click the
Auto Hide icon again to re‐dock each InfoCenter panel (all components in that panel will be
re‐docked).
• Move each InfoCenter component to other areas of your Call Logging window by clicking and
dragging the component tab to the desired location, or leave it floating as a stand‐alone
window. Or right‐click any component header and select Docking or Floating.
• Move an entire panel by clicking any header in the panel and dragging it to the desired
location in the Call Logging window. Or, you can leave the panel as a floating, stand‐alone
window. Double‐click the InfoCenter component or panel header to re‐dock it to its previous
location.
• Move tabs from one panel to another by clicking and dragging the tab to the other panel
(release when you see the new tab appear in the panel). You can also change the order of
the tabs in each panel by clicking and dragging.
96 HEAT
HEATBoard
View Menu Display Options
To access InfoCenter display options, select View>InfoCenter from the Call Logging menu bar. A
shortcut menu opens:
• Show Call Map ‐ When checked, displays the Call Map in the InfoCenter. Unchecked removes
the Call Map from display.
• Show HEATBoard ‐ When checked, displays the HEATBoard in the InfoCenter. Unchecked
removes the HEATBoard from display.
• Show Favorites ‐ When checked, displays the Favorites tab in the InfoCenter. Unchecked
removes the Favorites tab from display.
• Show CallBrowse ‐ When checked, displays the Call Browse tab in the InfoCenter. Unchecked
removes the Call Browse tab from display.
• Show Call Groups ‐ When checked, displays the Call Group tab in the InfoCenter. Unchecked
removes the Call Group tab from display.
• Show Auto Task ‐ When checked, displays the AutoTask tab in the InfoCenter. Unchecked
removes the AutoTask tab from display.
• Show Customer Groups ‐ When checked, displays the Customer Group tab in the InfoCenter.
Unchecked removes the Customer Group tab from display.
• Go to Call Map ‐ The equivalent of clicking the Call Map tab in the InfoCenter: the Call Map
becomes the active tab.
• Go to HEATBoard ‐ The equivalent of clicking the HEATBoard tab in the InfoCenter: the Call
Map becomes the active tab.
HEATBoard
The InfoCenter HEATBoard is an electronic bulletin board where HEAT users can post and read notices
pertaining to specific call issues or company‐related issues. For example, users can see that an issue is
logged and that corrective action is in progress. This could include one issue relating to many customers
(such as a printer malfunction or power failure) or an important issue all members of a team need to be
aware of (such as a new application patch release). The HEATBoard provides a venue where these issues
are made visible and their resolutions can be managed.
Using the HEATBoard, you can link all Call Records pertaining to a specific issue so that all of the calls are
managed together. One call is designated as the Lead Call, and all new information, actions, or final
resolutions for the issue are stored in the Lead Call. After an issue is resolved, you can automatically close
all of the Call Records linked to the Lead Call using the AutoClose feature. The resolution information
automatically posts to all of the linked calls. HEATBoard issues not linked to calls can be set to expire after
a certain date, to avoid out‐of‐date
HEATBoard tasks include:
• Navigating the HEATBoard
• Create HEATBoard Issues
• Designate a Lead Call
• Link Calls to HEATBoard Issues
User Guide 97
InfoCenter
Navigating the HEATBoard

If the InfoCenter HEATBoard is not visible, click the HEATBoard tab in the InfoCenter or press
Ctrl+Alt+B.
• To set preferences for the HEATBoard to govern the display, select Edit>User
Preferences>HEATBoard Tab (refer to "HEATBoard Preferences" for the procedure).
• To see issues related to a different View (such as a team), click the Global bar and select the
desired View.
Accessory Menu and Toolbar

Use the Accessory menu option to access HEATBoard commands to create, edit, and autoclose
issues, to open Groups, to designate a Lead Call, and to link/unlink calls. The HEATBoard toolbar
provides quick access to many of the HEATBoard commands.
HEATBoard Toolbar Buttons
The HEATBoard has a set of toolbar buttons to access HEATBoard functionality (from left to right):
• New HEATBoard Issue ‐ Opens the Create new HEATBoard Issue dialog box.
• HEATBoard Issue Details ‐ Displays the details of the selected issue.
• Link Current Call ‐ Links the currently‐active Call Record to the currently selected HEATBoard
issue. You can only link a Call Record to one HEATBoard issue.
• Open Group ‐ Opens the Call Group comprising the selected HEATBoard issue and its linked
calls.
• AutoClose ‐ Automatically closes all linked calls when you resolve the lead call. In order to
use the AutoClose button, you must type the closed information into the lead call, which in
turn populates the closed information in all of the linked calls.
• Refresh ‐ Refreshes the information in the HEATBoard.
98 HEAT
HEATBoard
HEATBoard Issue Icons
Issue icons provide information about the issue:
• Open Envelope Icon ‐ If this icon appears next to a HEATBoard issue, it indicates the
currently logged‐on user opened and read the issue. The icon changes from a closed
envelope to an open envelope when you highlight the issue.
• Crossed‐Out Push Pin Icon ‐ If this icon appears next to a HEATBoard issue, it indicates the
Lead Call was manually closed instead of being AutoClosed (AutoClose would have also
closed all of the linked calls). You may need to research why the Lead Call was manually
closed, leaving associated calls open.
• Push Pin Icon ‐ If this icon appears next to a HEATBoard issue, it indicates the issue has
associated, linked calls.
Create HEATBoard Issues

You can create and save HEATBoard issues to various Team views or to the Global view. You can select
the teams you want available on the HEATBoard in User Preferences.
You can also create an AutoTask which, when executed, creates a HEATBoard issue; refer to "AutoTask
Actions" for more information.
To Create a HEATBoard Issue:
1 Click the New HEATBoard Issue button or select Accessory>HEATBoard>New HEATBoard
Issue. The Create new HEATBoard Issue dialog box opens.
2 Type a description of the issue in the Text field, or click Get Description. Call Logging takes the
text from the Incident Description field in the currently‐active Call Record and populates the
Text field.
User Guide 99
InfoCenter
3 In the Save to View section, save the HEATBoard issue to either the Global or Team view. If
you select Team, choose the specific team from the drop‐down list.
4 In the Linked Calls section:
• Allow Linked Calls ‐ Allows other users to link their related calls to the HEATBoard issue.
Select this option only if your issue is Call Record‐related. The Link Current Call, AutoClose
and No AutoClose options become active.
• Link Current Call ‐ Links the currently‐active call to the HEATBoard issue. If the call is already
linked to a different HEATBoard issue, this option is unavailable since calls can only be linked
to one HEATBoard issue.
• AutoClose ‐ Allows the currently linked call to be closed upon resolution of the Lead Call. If
you did not select Link Current Call, this option is unavailable.
• No AutoClose ‐ The currently linked Call Record will not be autoclosed when the Lead Call is
resolved. If you did not select Link Current Call, this option is unavailable.
• Expiration ‐ If you do not select the Allow Linked Calls option, the Expiration section
becomes active, enabling you to set an expiration date/time. When issues expire, they are
automatically removed from the HEATBoard, keeping your message board free of out‐of‐
date issues.
5 Click OK. The new HEATBoard issue displays in the view to which you assigned it.
Edit HEATBoard Issues

After you create a HEATBoard issue, the only parameters you can edit are the description and the
view.
To Edit a HEATBoard Issue:
1 Select Accessory Menu>HEATBoard>Edit HEATBoard Issue, or right‐click a HEATBoard issue,
then select Edit HEATBoard Issue. The Edit HEATBoard Issue dialog box opens.
2 Make the change to either the Description or Save to View options.
3 Click OK.
AutoClose HEATBoard Issues

After a HEATBoard issue is resolved, you can autoclose it and all of its linked calls.
Note: When you automatically close HEATBoard issues, only the CallLog
information is included in the linked calls; not the Detail, Assignment, or Journal
information.
To AutoClose a HEATBoard Issue:
Note: When the call was initially linked to the issue, it must have been selected
for AutoClose in order for this operation to work.
1 Make sure the Lead Call is the Call Record currently active in Call Logging. Enter closing
information into the Lead Call. Closing information includes the Solution Description and
Cause.
2 In the InfoCenter, on the HEATBoard tab, click the AutoClose button.
100 HEAT
HEATBoard
3 The Lead Call and the linked Call Records are closed, with the following fields in those calls
updated:
• Cause
• Solution Description
• Status
• Closed fields
Note: If any of the linked calls selected for autoclose contain AutoTasks, you
may receive an AutoTask warning apprising you that not all of the AutoTask
actions are complete.
Designate a Lead Call

When a number of calls are linked to the same issue, you can designate one of the calls as a Lead Call.
The Lead Call acts as the single point‐of‐contact for the issue as well as a repository for new
information. You should enter any information about the issue into the Lead Call. Some issues could
have hundreds of linked calls. Using the Lead Call lets you quickly enter closing information, copy that
information to linked calls, and close the calls in the group. When designating a Lead Call and linking
calls, keep these conditions in mind:
• A call can only be linked to one issue.
• There can be only one Lead Call.
• A call that is added as a single issue is automatically designated as the Lead Call.
To Designate the Lead Call:
• Ensure the call you want designated as the Lead Call is active in the Call Logging main
window, then select Accessory >HEATBoard>Set Lead Call or right‐click within the
HEATBoard issue and select Set Lead Call.
Open the HEATBoard Group

You can view as a Group all of the linked calls associated with a Lead Call.
To Open a HEATBoard Group:
1 Select a Lead Call from the HEATBoard.
2 Click the Open Group button or select Accessory>HEATBoard>Open Group.
3 The Lead Call and all of its associated, linked calls become the active Group in the Call Logging
window. Navigate through the group using the Call Logging navigation buttons.
Link Calls to HEATBoard Issues

Link calls to an issue to expedite their resolution; solution information posted to a Lead Call is
automatically posted to the linked calls at the time of closure.
To Link a Call to a HEATBoard Issue:
1 Highlight the HEATBoard issue to which you want to link the call.
2 Select Accessory>HEATBoard>Link current call. The Link Current Call to HEATBoard Issue
dialog box opens.
User Guide 101

InfoCenter
3 Select Allow this call to be AutoClosed if you want to AutoClose this call when the Lead Call is
resolved.
4 Click OK.
Unlink Calls from HEATBoard Issues

You may need to unlink a Call Record from a HEATBoard issue. If the Call Record you want to
unlink is the Lead Call, a warning appears. If you unlink the Lead Call, the previous Lead Call or the
oldest linked call in sequence becomes the new Lead Call.
To Unlink a Call from a HEATBoard Issue:
• Make sure the Call Record you want to unlink is the currently‐active Call Record. Select
Accessory Menu>HEATBoard>Unlink Current Call or right‐click within the HEATBoard issue
and select Unlink Current Call.
Call Map
Like a table of contents, the InfoCenter Call Map provides a quick overview of the currently‐displayed Call
Record. Double‐click any item in the Call Map tree to navigate to the corresponding form or window.
The HEAT administrator determines which Call Map categories are available; each user determines which
categories to display.
• If the Call Map is not visible, click the Call Map tab in the InfoCenter.
• Click the plus and minus signs to the left of each category to expand or collapse the branch.
• Double‐click a branch or item in a branch to view the form or window.
• Right‐click any item in the Call Map to access shortcut menus.
• Shortcut menus allow you to navigate to, create, edit, and delete records.
102 HEAT
Favorites
• In User Preferences, you can determine which categories to include on your Call Map: select
Edit>User Preferences>Call Map Tab (refer to "Call Map Preferences" for the procedure) to
configure categories and other display options.
Favorites
Use the InfoCenter Favorites tab to quickly access the Call Records, Call or Customer Groups, AutoTasks,
files, or Internet links you frequently use. Favorites can be organized into folders.
Available Functions
Move your mouse over any item in the list to reveal details.
Right‐click on the Favorites tab to add favorites, organize favorites (including adding folders,
moving, renaming, and deleting favorites or folders), and import/export favorites.
To Add Favorites
1 The Favorites tab is initially empty. Right‐click and select Add to Favorites. The Add a Favorite
dialog box opens.
2 Type a name for the favorite.
Note: You can also add a favorite by right‐clicking a Call Record, AutoTask,
Customer Group, or Call Group from the list on the corresponding tab, then
select Add to Favorites. Most of the Add a Favorite dialog box fields will be
automatically populated. Or you can click and drag Call Records, AutoTasks,
Customer Groups, or Call Groups into Favorites. You can click and drag files
from Windows Explorer, and you can drag URLs from your browser window
onto the Favorites tab.
3 In the Create in field, specify a folder or click New Folder to create a folder.
User Guide 103

InfoCenter
4 Select the type:
• If you select AutoTask, Call Group, or Customer Group, click the browse button next to the
field below the Type field to select the item.
• If you select Call Record, type the Call ID in the field below the Type field.
• If you select File Link, click the browse button to select the file.
• If you select Internet Link, type the URL in the field below the Type field.
• If you select Heat Web Link, you can specify Internet links and documents (type or click the
browse button) that will display on the Web tab in Call Logging.
5 Type a description (optional).
6 Click Add.
To Organize Favorites
1 Right‐click and select Organize Favorites. The Organize Favorites dialog box opens.
• Click the New Folder button to create a folder; type a name then press Enter.
• Select a favorite or folder, then click the Move button; the Browse for Folder dialog box
opens, enabling you to select the folder or create a new folder.
• Click the Rename button the change the name of the selected favorite or folder, then press
Enter.
• Click the Delete button to remove the selected favorite or folder from the Favorites tab. Click
Yes to confirm the deletion.
2 Click Close.
To Import and Export Favorites
1 Right‐click and select Import and Export. The Import/Export Settings dialog box opens.
• Import from Internet Explorer ‐ Select this option to import your favorites from your
Internet Explorer browser; click OK. If you already have favorites on the Favorites tab, you
will be asked if you want to replace them; click Yes or No.
• Import from a file ‐ Select this option to import favorites from an XML file; in the field that
displays when you select this option, type the file path or click the browse button to locate
the file. Click OK. If you already have favorites on the Favorites tab, you will be asked if you
want to replace them; click Yes or No.
• Export to a file ‐ Select this option to export your favorites to an XML file; in the field that
displays when you select this option, type the file path or click the browse button to specify
the name and storage location for the file. Click OK. A confirmation message displays.
2 Click OK.
Additional Menu Options
Right‐click a favorite to access additional functions:
• Open ‐ Opens a Call or Customer Group, displays a Call Record, runs an AutoTask, opens an
Internet link, opens a HEAT Web link (on the Call Logging Web tab), or opens a file.
• Expand ‐ Available when a folder is selected; opens the folder to display contents.
• Create New Folder ‐ Creates a new folder; type a name, then press Enter.
• Copy/Paste ‐ Standard copy/paste functionality.
104 HEAT
Call Browse
• Delete ‐ Provides the option to remove the selected favorite or folder; click Yes to confirm.
• Rename ‐ Type a new name for the selected favorite or folder, then press Enter.
• Properties ‐ Opens the Properties dialog box, enabling you to edit the favorite. For example,
you can edit an Internet link by changing the Type to Heat Web Link, which will display the
Internet page on the Web tab in Call Logging.
Call Browse
The InfoCenter Call Browse tab lists the Call Records for the currently‐active Call Group. The tab provides
the same grid view as the Call Record Browse function; refer to "Search by Browsing" for details.
To Display a Call Record in the List:
• Synchronize Displays ‐ Synchronizes the Call Logging display with the selection in the Call
Browse tab; also, use this option to quickly scroll through all Call Records in the currently‐
active Call Group, displaying each record as you click through the list in the Call Browse tab.
• If the Synchronize Displays option is deselected, double‐click an entry in the panel to display
that Call Record.
Available Functions
Move your mouse over any record in the list to reveal all record details from the Call Browse tab
grid.
Right‐click any record in the list to access the following menu options:
• Go to Call ‐ Displays the selected Call Record.
• Print ‐ Prints all Call Records listed on the Call Browse tab.
• Page Setup ‐ Opens the Grid Page Setup dialog box; click the Help button for details.
• Copy ‐ Copies the grid page details of the selected Call Record.
• Reset Column Widths ‐ Resets the grid columns back to the original width.
User Guide 105

InfoCenter
• Enable Grouping ‐ As with any grid view, you can re‐sort the displayed information by
clicking any column header, then click the header arrow to sort in descending and ascending
order. You can also drag and drop the column headers to change the column order. Click the
Enable Grouping option to sort information by dragging and dropping a column header to
the area below the Call Browse header (labeled Drag a column header here to group by that
column). When you enable grouping, the menu option changes to Disable Grouping.
• Export ‐ Exports all Call Records listed on the Call Browse tab; can be save as an Excel, XML,
or .txt file
• Add to Favorites ‐ Enables you to save the selected Call Record to the Favorites tab; refer to
"Favorites" for details. You can also click and drag a Call Record to the Favorites tab.
AutoTasks
The InfoCenter AutoTask tab provides the same list of AutoTasks, arranged in folders, as the Manage
AutoTasks dialog box. To see AutoTasks associated with a different View (such as a specific team), click
the drop‐down arrow below the AutoTasks tab header and select the desired View.
Available Functions
Move your mouse over any AutoTask in the list to reveal the AutoTask name, description, and the
Actions that comprise the AutoTask.
Right‐click any AutoTask in the list to access the following menu options, including several
Manage AutoTasks functions:
• Run ‐ Runs the selected AutoTask.
• Add ‐ Opens the Add/Edit Task dialog box, enabling you to create a new AutoTask; click the
Help button for details.
• Edit ‐ Opens the Add/Edit Task dialog box, enabling you to edit the selected AutoTask; click
the Help button for details.
• Delete ‐ Provides the option to delete the selected AutoTask from Call Logging; click OK to
confirm.
106 HEAT
Customer Groups
• Copy ‐ Opens the Add/Edit Task dialog box, enabling you to create a new AutoTask; click the
Help button, then select the Copy AutoTasks topic from the online help Contents.
• New folder ‐ Opens the New Folder dialog box; create folders to organize the AutoTasks.
• Show Empty Folders ‐ Displays all folders including empty folders.
• Associated Toolbar Button ‐ Opens the Select Image dialog box, enabling you to create a
toolbar button for the selected AutoTask to run it directly from the toolbar; refer to "Working
with AutoTasks" for details. If you right‐click an AutoTask that has a toolbar button, that
button will be displayed to the left of the Associated Toolbar Button option in the shortcut
menu, enabling you to quickly identify the button in the toolbar.
• Add to Favorites ‐ Enables you to save the selected AutoTask to the Favorites tab; refer to
"Favorites" for details. You can also click and drag an AutoTask to the Favorites tab.
Customer Groups
The InfoCenter Customer Group tab provides the same list of Customer Groups as the Open Customer
Group dialog box. To see Customer Groups associated with a different View (such as a specific team), click
the drop‐down arrow below the Customer Groups tab header and select the desired View.
Available Functions
Move your mouse over any group in the list to reveal the Customer Group name, description, and
the expression text (the first 3 lines) that defined the search criteria to create the Customer
Group.
Right‐click any group in the list to access the following menu options, including several Customer
Group functions also provided in the Customer window:
• Open ‐ Opens selected Customer Group.
• Add ‐ Opens the New Customer Group dialog box, enabling you to create a new group; refer
to "Create Customer Groups" for details.
• Edit ‐ Opens the Edit Customer Group dialog box, enabling you to modify the selected group;
click the Help button for details.
User Guide 107

InfoCenter
• Delete ‐ Provides the option to delete the selected Customer Group from Call Logging; click
OK to confirm.
• Add to Favorites ‐ Enables you to save the selected Customer Group to the Favorites tab;
refer to "Favorites" for details. You can also click and drag a Customer Group to the Favorites
tab.
Call Groups
The InfoCenter Call Group tab provides the same list of Call Groups as the Open Call Group dialog box. To
see Call Groups associated with a different View (such as a specific team), click the drop‐down arrow
below the Call Group tab header and select the desired View.
Available Functions
Move your mouse over any group in the list to reveal the Call Group name, description, and the
expression text (the first 3 lines) that defined the search criteria to create the Call Group.
Right‐click any group in the list to access the following menu options, including many of the Call
Group functions provided in the Group main menu option:
• Open ‐ Opens the selected Call Group.
• Add ‐ Opens the New Call Group dialog box, enabling you to create a new group; click the
Help button for details.
• New Hot List ‐ Opens the Create Hot List dialog box, enabling you to create a new Hot List
group; click the Help button for details.
• Edit ‐ Opens the Edit Call Group dialog box, enabling you to modify the selected group; click
the Help button for details.
• Delete ‐ Provides the option to delete the selected Call Group from Call Logging; click OK to
confirm.
108 HEAT
Call Groups
• Associated Toolbar Button ‐ Opens the Select Image dialog box, enabling you to create a
toolbar button for the selected Call Group to open it directly from the toolbar; refer to
"Create Toolbar Buttons for Call Groups" for details. If you right‐click a Call Group that has a
toolbar button, that button will be displayed to the left of the Associated Toolbar Button
option in the shortcut menu, enabling you to quickly identify the button in the toolbar.
• Add to Favorites ‐ Enables you to save the selected Call Group to the Favorites tab; refer to
"Favorites" for details. You can also click and drag a Call Group to the Favorites tab.
User Guide 109

InfoCenter
110 HEAT
11
AutoTasks
An AutoTask is a user‐defined operation that performs one or more actions with a single click. AutoTasks
can be simple (one action) or complex (two or more actions). For example, you can create a simple
AutoTask to send an email to a contact, acknowledging receipt of the contact’s inquiry. Or, you can create
a complex AutoTask to create an Employee Setup record, create the necessary tasks associated with the
process, then notify the respective teams of the new assignments for the work order. The AutoTask
feature is especially useful for automating routine or repetitive actions, such as sending thank you letters
or flagging assignments. HEAT offers several predefined AutoTasks for your use. Use these AutoTasks, edit
them, delete them, or create your own.
When creating and managing AutoTasks, you can:
• Designate an audience for an AutoTask by selecting a View for the AutoTask.
• Organize AutoTasks by folder. AutoTasks are organized by folder in a tree format (filtered by
View). HEAT provides some default folders such as Quick Assignments, Copy Calls, and Quick
Messages for your use.
• Create a toolbar button for each AutoTask and place it on your toolbar for easy access.
• Use the Manage AutoTasks dialog box to create, edit, copy, delete and run AutoTasks; create,
edit, and delete folders; add AutoTasks to the AutoTask menu for easy access; and create
toolbar buttons for AutoTasks.
• Import and export AutoTasks so that they can be shared between systems. AutoTasks are
exported as HEAT Export files (.hef).
For AutoTask procedures, refer to:
• Working with AutoTasks
• Import AutoTasks
• Export AutoTasks
• AutoTask Actions
• Inserting HEAT Values
AutoTasks
Working with AutoTasks

The following procedures can be performed for AutoTasks from the Manage AutoTasks dialog box. You
can also Import AutoTasks and Export AutoTasks; select these options from the AutoTasks menu.
• Create AutoTasks
• Edit AutoTasks
• Copy AutoTasks
• Delete AutoTasks
• Run AutoTasks
• Work with AutoTask Folders
• Create AutoTasks Toolbar Buttons
You can also work with AutoTasks on the AutoTask tab in the InfoCenter. AutoTasks can be added to the
InfoCenter Favorites tab for quick access. Refer to "InfoCenter" for details.
Create AutoTasks
You can create AutoTasks for Call Records or Customer Records. To create an AutoTask for Customer
Records, be sure to have the Customer window active in Call Logging.
To Create an AutoTask:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select AutoTask>Manage AutoTasks. The Manage AutoTasks
dialog box opens.
2 Click Add. The Add/Edit Task dialog box opens.
112 HEAT
3 In the Name field, type a descriptive name for the AutoTask.
4 In the Description field, type a brief description for the AutoTask.
5 To display the AutoTask on the AutoTask menu, select Display on Menu (if you do not select
this option, you must run the AutoTask from the Manage AutoTasks dialog box).
6 In the Save to View section, specify the View (audience) who will have access to the AutoTask.
If you click Team, select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list.
7 To organize the AutoTask by folder, select an existing folder in the Folder drop‐down list.
Note: If the folder does not yet exist, exit the task, and create the folder.
8 In the Actions section, click Add to add an action. The Specify Action Type dialog box opens
(refer to "AutoTask Actions" for more information).
9 Select the action you want to define, then click OK. A dialog box opens, specific to that
AutoTask action, enabling you to define the details for the action.
10 Complete the details of the action, then click OK. The action now appears in the Add/Edit Task
dialog box under Actions.
• To edit an action, select the action, then click Edit.
• To delete an action, select the action, then click Remove.
11 Continue to add actions as needed by repeating steps 8 through 10.
12 To display all folders, including empty folders, select the Show Empty Folders check box.
13 To display a confirmation dialog box before the AutoTask is run, select the Confirm AutoTask
Run check box. The confirmation dialog box displays the AutoTask name and description, and
requires the user to click OK to confirm the AutoTask run.
14 Click OK. The AutoTask now appears in the Manage AutoTasks dialog box.
After you create the AutoTask, you can create a toolbar button for the AutoTask, run the AutoTask, or
export the AutoTask.
User Guide 113

AutoTasks
Edit AutoTasks
To Edit an AutoTask:
1 In the Manage AutoTasks dialog box, select the AutoTask you want to modify, then click Edit.
2 The Add/Edit Task dialog box opens, in which you can modify the name, description, View,
folder, and actions.
3 When all changes have been made, click OK.
4 Close the Manage AutoTasks dialog box, or run the AutoTask.
Copy AutoTasks
To Copy an AutoTask:
1 In the Manage AutoTasks dialog box, select the AutoTask you want to copy, then click Copy.
2 The Add/Edit Task dialog box opens, in which you can modify the name, description, View,
folder, and actions of the selected AutoTask to create a new AutoTask (you must at least
modify the name).
3 Click OK.
4 Close the Manage AutoTasks dialog box, or run the AutoTask.
Delete AutoTasks
To Delete an AutoTask:
1 In the Manage AutoTasks dialog box, select the AutoTask you want to delete, then click
Delete.
2 Click OK to confirm the deletion.
3 Close the Manage AutoTasks dialog box.
Run AutoTasks
You can run an AutoTask against Call Records or Customer Records. To run an AutoTask against
Customer Records, be sure to have the Customer window active in Call Logging.
You can also run an AutoTask by clicking the associated toolbar button (if defined), or by selecting the
AutoTasks from the AutoTask menu (if defined).
To Run an AutoTask:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select AutoTask>Manage AutoTasks.
2 At the Manage AutoTasks dialog box, select:
• Run ‐ Runs the selected AutoTask against records in your database.
• Group Run ‐ Runs the selected AutoTask against records in the currently open group.
3 If the Confirm AutoTask Run check box was selected for this task, a confirmation dialog box
opens.
4 Click OK to confirm the AutoTask run.
114 HEAT
Work with AutoTask Folders

You can create AutoTasks folders to organize your AutoTasks. Folders are created and listed in
alphabetical order in the Manage AutoTasks dialog box. HEAT provides some default folders such as
Quick Assignments, Copy Calls, and Quick Messages for your use.
You can create AutoTasks for Call Records or Customer Records. To work with Customer Record
AutoTasks, be sure to have the Customer window active in Call Logging.
To Create an AutoTask Folder:
dialog box opens.
2 Click New Folder. The New Folder dialog box opens.
3 Type a name for the new folder, then click OK. The new folder appears in the Manage
AutoTasks dialog box. You can add AutoTasks to the folder.
To Edit an AutoTask Folder:
dialog box opens.
2 Select the folder you want to edit, then click Edit. The folder name becomes available for
editing.
3 Type a new name for the folder.
4 Click Close.
To Delete an AutoTask Folder:
dialog box opens.
2 Select the folder you want to delete, then click Delete.
Note: To delete all AutoTasks, select the Tasks folder.
3 The Delete Folder dialog box opens. You can:
• Move the items currently in the folder to a different folder (specify the folder).
• Move items out of the folder.
• Also delete the items in the folder.
4 Select the desired option, then click OK.
Create AutoTasks Toolbar Buttons

You can create a toolbar button for an AutoTask, so you can run it directly from the toolbar. To work
with Customer Record AutoTasks, be sure to have the Customer window active in Call Logging.
To Create a Toolbar Button for an AutoTask:
dialog box opens.
2 In the View section, select the View (audience) whose AutoTasks you want to display. If you
click Team, select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list.
User Guide 115

AutoTasks
3 In the list of AutoTasks (filtered by View), select the AutoTask for which you want to create a
toolbar button.
7 Click OK. The button is placed on the toolbar.
Note: Since the button does not display any tooltips, FrontRange Solutions
recommends selecting the Confirm AutoTask Run check box for the task (in the
Manage AutoTasks dialog box) to display the confirmation dialog box before
the AutoTask is run. The confirmation dialog box displays the AutoTask name
and description, and requires users to confirm the AutoTask run.
Import AutoTasks
You can import AutoTasks that have been exported to a HEAT Export File (.hef), so that you can share
AutoTasks between systems. An .hef file can contain one or many AutoTasks.
You can also use the Import feature to create and test AutoTasks on a test system before implementing
them in a live system.
You can import an AutoTask to use with Call Records or Customer Records. To import an AutoTask for
To Import an AutoTask:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select AutoTask>Import. The Import AutoTask dialog box
opens.
2 In the View section, select the View (audience) for whom you will be importing the AutoTask.
If you click Team, select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list.
3 In the list of AutoTasks (filtered by View), select the folder to which you will import the
AutoTask.
4 Click Browse to navigate to the .hef file to be imported.
5 Click Import.
Note: If you choose to import an AutoTask that already exists in your system,
HEAT checks for any differences in the AutoTasks. If no changes are detected,
HEAT automatically copies over the original AutoTask. If a difference is
detected, HEAT prompts you, asking if you want to: import over the original,
create a new AutoTask (with an appended name), or cancel the operation.
116 HEAT
Export AutoTasks
Export AutoTasks
You can export AutoTasks so that you can share AutoTasks between systems. You export AutoTasks to a
HEAT Export file (.hef). You can export one or many AutoTasks to an .hef file.
Use the Export feature to create and test AutoTasks on a test system before implementing them in a live
system.
You can export an AutoTask to use with Call Records or Customer Records. To export an AutoTask for
To Export an AutoTask:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select AutoTask>Export. The Export AutoTask dialog box
opens.
2 In the View section, select the View (audience) whose AutoTask you want to export. If you
3 In the list of AutoTasks (filtered by View), select the AutoTask(s) to be exported.
4 Click Browse to navigate to an export location. By default, AutoTasks are exported to your
current HEAT directory.
5 Click Export.
AutoTask Actions
An action tells an AutoTask what to do (for example, send an email). Selecting an action opens a dialog
box containing the configuration settings for that action. Most actions also enable you to insert some or
all of the following HEAT values:
• Insert Field
• Insert Function
• Insert Filename
• Insert Temporary Filename
• Insert All Assignments/Insert All Journals
• Insert Blank Value
• Insert New Line
• Insert Counter
An AutoTask can contain one action (simple AutoTask) or many actions (complex AutoTask). Actions are
listed in the Specify Action Type dialog box that opens when you are creating an AutoTask.
User Guide 117

AutoTasks
HEAT AutoTask Actions include (arranged alphabetically):
• Create Activity Log Record ‐ Use this action to record consistently‐ recurring activities that may
not be captured by the Stopwatch. You can run this AutoTask instead of opening the Activity
Log and manually adding a new record.
Note: Every time you modify a Call Record, a new entry is generated in the
Activity Log. However, if you open a call and do work without modifying the
Record, your efforts are not captured by the log.
• Create an Alarm ‐ Creates a reminder to perform a task or a notification that a time period has
elapsed. When you create an alarm by using an AutoTask, you can include information from
Call Record fields into the alarm message, thereby eliminating the need to retrieve the original
call.
• Create Assignment ‐ Creates a new assignment. The setup dialog box functions similarly to
Create a Call in that the fields from the Assignment table are available for modification. Field
values can be appended or overwritten using the same method as in Create a Call.
• Create Call ‐ Creates a new Call Record, saving time by automating many of the call creation
steps. By logging even the quick calls, each call is documented and work flow processes are
recorded completely.
• Create Configuration ‐ Creates a new Configuration record.
• Create Contact ‐ Create a new Contact record.
• Create Customer Login ‐ Creates a new Customer Login ID.
• Create Journal ‐ Creates a new journal entry. The functionality behind the setup window is
similar to Create an Assignment in that the fields from the Journal table are available for
modification. Users can append or overwrite values in the fields.
• Create Profile ‐ Creates a new Profile record.
• Display Message Box ‐ Displays a message dialog box (during the AutoTask run) which can be
configured to convey information, or to enable the AutoTask, depending on conditions during
the execution, to branch off to another AutoTask action.
• Execute External Service Request ‐ Calls a Web Service or selects a third‐party application to
exchange information with HEAT utilizing .NET capability.
• Goto Call(Ticket) ‐ Performs the same action as Ctrl+G or File>Go to Call ID: enables you to
open a specific Call Record by its Call ID. You can also use this action to link calls by configuring
a HEAT expression to specify which Call Records to open.
118 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
• HEATBoard Issue ‐ Creates a HEATBoard issue. The setup dialog box mirrors the dialog box that
opens when creating a HEATBoard issue in the InfoCenter, with a few exceptions, due to the
fact that the issue is not created until the AutoTask runs.
• If Field is Empty Statement ‐ Adds an If statement to conditionally execute other AutoTasks if
the specified field is not populated with data.
• If Statement ‐ Adds an If statement to conditionally execute other AutoTasks. For example, you
can use an If statement to stop your SLA clock (run the Stop Clock AutoTask) if a call is
suspended (status = suspended).
• Jump to a Control ‐ Places your cursor in specific field on a form. This action is best used after
running another AutoTask. For example, after you run an AutoTask that creates a new Record,
the Jump to a Control AutoTask might position the cursor in the Call Log Status field so you can
change the status.
• Perform Dynamic Data Exchange ‐ Performs Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) with another
application. DDE is a system that exchanges data with another application through a series of
commands. This feature is designed for programmers and advanced HEAT administrators who
are familiar with DDE mechanisms.
Note: Integration and setup options for these processes vary according to
application and vendor, so you should contact your Sales Representative for a
list of certified vendors or contact the HEAT Support Desk for more information.
• Print Information ‐ Sends selected information from a Call Record directly to the printer. You
can also format text and field elements to suit a custom printout. This customization ability sets
this feature apart from the print functionality available through the main Call Logging menu
bar.
• Run an AutoTask ‐ Runs multiple, established AutoTasks as one Super AutoTask. The individual
AutoTasks execute in the order in which you add them, and they prompt the user for additional
information, if required.
• Run a Program ‐ Launches an executable file (.exe, .com, .bat).
• Send a Broadcast ‐ Sends a HEAT Broadcast message and, if needed, an attached Call Record to
every person in your Mail Group.
• Send a Message ‐ Sends an email message through SupportMail or any mail protocol used in
Call Logging: POP3/SMTP, MAPI, Lotus and GroupWise email systems. You can populate fields
in the email with information from the current Call Record.
• Update Call ‐ Updates an existing Call Record by appending or populating fields. The setup
window is similar to Create a Call in that the fields from the tables can be modified. Values can
be appended or overwritten in the fields using the same steps performed in Create a Call.
• Update Configuration ‐ Updates an existing Configuration record by appending or completing
fields.
• Update Contact ‐ Updates an existing Contact record by appending or populating fields.
• Update Customer Login ‐ Updates an existing Customer Login ID.
• Update Profile ‐ Updates an existing Profile record by appending or populating fields.
• Web Browse ‐ Launches a Web page and if needed, transfers data from the Call Record to the
Web page. for example, an AutoTask could be created to open the Google Web site and
transfer information from the Call Record as the search criteria. The Web page can be opened
within Call Logging (multiple Web pages can be opened on the Web tab), in a browser outside
of the HEAT system, or the system can simply pass data to a Web site without opening the Web
page.
User Guide 119

AutoTasks
• Write a File to Disk ‐ Captures Call Record information in a file or temporary file format. You can
then use the file as an argument for some other executable to process, or it can remain as a
text record of selected data fields from the call. This function is often used in conjunction with
other actions in a more complex AutoTask.
Field Icons
Field icons identify the type of data required in a field. These icons are used in the field tables that
appear in the various AutoTask Action dialog boxes (such as Create Call, Create Journal, etc.).
Date Field ‐ Stores a date using the format specified for date
entries.
Time Field ‐ Stores a particular time using the format specified
for time entries.
Decimal Field ‐ Stores a number that can contain a decimal.
Number Field ‐ Stores whole numbers.
Logical Field ‐ Stores a Yes or No value.
Text Field ‐ Stores letters, numbers, and punctuation.
Memo Field ‐ Stores a large amount of text.
Required Field ‐ Indicates you must provide a value in order for
the AutoTask to run properly or for the HMC Filter action to
perform the action.
Create Activity Log Record

Use this action to record consistently recurring activities that may not be captured by the Stopwatch.
You can run this AutoTask instead of opening the Activity Log and manually adding a new record.
Note: Every time you modify a Call Record, a new entry is generated in the
Activity Log. However, if you open a call and do work without modifying the
Record, your efforts are not captured by the log.
To Create an Activity Log Record Action:
1 Follow steps 1‐8 in the Create AutoTasks procedure.
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create Activity Log Record, then click OK. The
AutoTask Create Activity Action dialog box opens.
120 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create Activity Log Record action.
4 In the Record Type drop‐down list, select the type of activity you are documenting:
• OFFLINE ‐ Work time not automatically recorded by HEAT.
• ONLINE ‐ Work performed within the HEAT system.
• UNSAVED ‐ Abandoned changes to Call Records.
5 In the Duration section, select the amount of time you want automatically added to the
Activity Log for the current activity.
6 Select the calendar on which your organization runs. The duration that you choose is
constrained by the calendar you select. For example, if you were to add a nine‐hour duration
on a calendar set up with an eight‐hour work day, the log records activity on two different
days.
7 In the Activity Description section, type an appropriate description for the activity, then click
the Insert button to insert any fields from the Call Record you might want to include.
8 Your system administrator determines the Watch fields (tracked fields are referred to as Watch
fields) that appear at the bottom of the dialog box (there can be up to three). Those appearing
in the HEAT demo data are:
• Category
• Priority
• Cause
Place the cursor in any of these watch fields, and click the Insert button to place the
appropriate Call Log field in the field. These watch fields have their own columns on the
Activity log. If you set them up here, when the AutoTask runs, the values in these fields appear
in the specified columns.
9 Click OK.
User Guide 121

AutoTasks
Create an Alarm
Use this action to create a reminder to perform a task or a notification that a time period has elapsed.
When you create an alarm by using an AutoTask, you can include information from Call Record fields
in the alarm message, thereby eliminating the need to retrieve the original call. When you configure
this action, you type the alert message and schedule the alert. You can include HEAT field values,
@Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, or counters in the subject or
body of the alert.
To Create an Alarm Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create an Alarm, then click OK. The AutoTask
Alarm Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create an Alarm action.
4 In the When section, schedule the alarm action. The values you type in the Time fields reflect
the amount of time you want to elapse from the running of the AutoTask to the sounding of
the alarm.
5 Select a calendar from the Calendar drop‐down list (all defined Hours of Operation calendars
are listed).
Note: The time value you selected in step 4 is limited by the calendar's active
hours.
6 In the Subject field, type a description for the alarm action. You can also click the Insert button
to incorporate HEAT data into the subject.
7 In the Note section, define the alarm text. You can also click the Insert button to incorporate
HEAT data into the note.
8 Select Attach Current Call if you want the currently active Call Record to attach to the alarm
action.
9 Click OK.
122 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
Create Assignment
Use this action to create a new assignment. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT which
fields to automatically populate in an Assignment record. You can populate the fields with HEAT field
values,@Functions, counters, filenames, or blank values.
To Create a Create Assignment Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create Assignment, then click OK. The AutoTask
Create Assignment Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create Assignment action.
4 In the New Assignment section, specify when to create a new Assignment:
• Always create a new assignment ‐ Creates a new Assignment each time you run the Create
Assignment AutoTask.
• If the current assignment is new call, then use it ‐ The current Assignment is used if it is
new. Another Assignment is not created.
• If the current assignment is new, ask ‐ Prompts Call Logging to ask which Assignment should
be used when the AutoTask action launches.
5 In the Options section, determine if you want to:
• Acknowledge assignment ‐ The AutoTask acknowledges the Assignment. The Assignee, date
acknowledged, and time acknowledged information auto fills the Assignment Status
Acknowledged fields.
• Resolve assignment ‐ The AutoTask resolves the Assignment. The Assignee, date
acknowledged, and time acknowledged information auto fills the Assignment Status
Resolved fields.
User Guide 123

AutoTasks
• Save call when done ‐ The AutoTask attempts to save the call. Ensure all the saved required
fields have values. If not, the Call Record cannot save, and a message displays explaining the
reason(s).
Note: If you are a central call dispatcher, you could set up individual Create
Assignment AutoTasks and associated toolbar icons for each Assignee. This
greatly facilitates work assignments and reduces data entry time.
6 In the list of Fields, select the fields you want to populate when the record is created. Selecting
a field activates one or more of the adjacent controls: the additional configuration icon
(example: with the DateAssign field selected, clicking this icon opens the Select Date dialog
box), the Validate button or the Insert button. You can click Validate or Insert to define the
data that will populate the field. All required fields (identified by a lightning bolt icon) must be
defined.
• The Overwrite column tells Call Logging whether or not you want to overwrite, append, or
insert data in front of any data that may already be in the field. Select Yes to overwrite
existing values; select No to write values in blank fields. Only memo fields allow the Append
and Insert Before options.
• To assign a new value to a field, highlight the field and then designate a value (either by
typing a value in the Value for Text Field box, validating the field by clicking the Validate
button to open the Validate From dialog box, or inserting variables using the Insert button).
7 When you have finished selecting fields, click Check to verify you have used valid formats for
each.
IMPORTANT: The Check button validates formats only, not values. Only after
the AutoTask is run can you verify that all of your values are valid. If the
AutoTask contains invalid values, an AutoTask Warning dialog box opens,
informing you which field(s) contain errors.
8 Click OK.
Create Call
Use this action to create a new Call Record, saving time by automating many of the call creation steps.
By logging even the quick calls, each call is documented and work flow processes are recorded
completely. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT which forms and fields to automatically
populate in a Call Record. You can populate the fields with HEAT field values,@Functions, counters,
filenames, or blank values.
To Create a Create Call Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create Call, then click OK. The AutoTask Create
Call Action dialog box opens.
124 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create Call action.
4 In the New Call section, specify when to create a new call:
• Always create a new call ‐ Creates a new Call Record each time you run the Create Call
AutoTask.
• If the current call is a new call, then use it ‐ The current Call Record is used if it is new.
Another Call Record is not created.
• If the current call is a new call, ask ‐ Prompts Call Logging to ask which Call Record should be
used when the AutoTask action launches.
• Close call ‐ The AutoTask attempts to close the call. Ensure all the closing required fields are
populated. If not, the Call Record does not close and a message displays explaining the
reason(s).
reason(s).
6 In the Table drop‐down list, select the type of record you want to create:
• CallLog
• Detail
• Subset
(example: with the CallLog ClosedDate field selected, clicking this icon opens the Select Date
dialog box), the Validate button or the Insert button. You can click Validate or Insert to define
the data that will populate the field. All required fields (identified by a lightning bolt icon) must
be defined.
User Guide 125

AutoTasks
each.
9 Click OK.
Create Configuration
Use this action to create a new Configuration record. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT
which values to automatically populate in the Configuration record. You can populate the fields with
HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, counters,
lines, or blank values.
To Create a Create Configuration Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create Configuration, then click OK. The
AutoTask Create Configuration Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create Configuration action.
4 Since you are creating a Configuration record, the Config table is displayed by default in the
Table field.
5 In the Configuration Type drop‐down list, select the type of record you want to create. The
fields for the selected Configuration Type appear in the Fields list.
(example: with the Equipment PurchaseDate field selected, clicking this icon opens the Select
Date dialog box), the Validate button or the Insert button. You can click Validate or Insert to
define the data that will populate the field. All required fields (identified by a lightning bolt
icon) must be defined.
126 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
each.
8 Click OK.
Create Contact
Use this action to create a new Contact record. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT which
fields to automatically populate in the Contact record. You can populate the fields with HEAT field
values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, counters, lines, or blank
values.
To Create a Create Contact Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create Contact, then click OK. The AutoTask
Create Contact Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create Contact action.
4 In the Customer Type drop‐down list, select the type of record you want to create. The fields
for the selected Customer Type appear in the Fields list.
(example: with the Notes field selected, clicking this icon opens the AutoTask Field Zoom
be defined.
User Guide 127

AutoTasks
each.
7 Click OK.
Create Customer Login

Use this action to create a new Customer Login. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT which
fields to automatically populate in the Customer Login. You can populate the fields with HEAT field
values.
To Create a Create Customer Login Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create Customer Login, then click OK. The
AutoTask Create Customer Login Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create Customer Login action.
4 The HEATCAI table displays in the Table field by default. This table stores all customer login
information. The fields in the HEATCAI table appear in the Fields list.
128 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
5 In the list of Fields, select the fields you want to populate when the login is created. You can
click Insert to define the data that will populate the field. All required fields (identified by a
lightning bolt icon) must be defined.
typing a value in the Value for Text Field box, or inserting variables using the Insert button).
each.
7 Click OK.
Create Journal
Use this action to create a new journal entry. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT which
fields to automatically populate in a Journal record. You can populate the fields with HEAT field
values,@Functions, counters, filenames, or blank values.
This feature helps facilitate frequently‐used processes, such as setting up a new employee workspace.
You can generate a Journal Entry to add to the Call Record noting all the associated tasks and
assignees. The Quick Journal functionality built into the sample database may also be a helpful tool to
enter standard comments quickly.
You can also use this action to enter standard, repetitive comments about a call such as, customer did
not answer phone ‐ left a voice mail message or the user will try the suggestion and call back
shortly.
To Create a Create Journal Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create Journal, then click OK. The AutoTask
Create Journal Action dialog box opens.
User Guide 129

AutoTasks
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create Journal action.
4 In the New Journal Entry section, specify when to create a new Journal entry:
• Always create a new journal entry ‐ Creates a new Journal entry each time the Create
Journal AutoTask runs.
• If the current journal is new call, then use it ‐ The current Journal entry is used if it is new.
Another Journal entry is not created.
• If the current journal is new, ask ‐ This selection prompts Call Logging to ask which Journal
entry should be used when the AutoTask action launches.
5 Select the Save call when done check box to have the AutoTask attempt to save the call.
Ensure all the saved required fields have values. If not, the Call Record cannot save, and a
message displays explaining the reason(s).
(example: with the EntryDate field selected, clicking this icon opens the Select Date dialog
box), the Validate button or the Insert button. You can click Validate or Insert to define the
data that will populate the field. All required fields (identified by a lightning bolt icon) must be
defined.
each.
8 Click OK.
130 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
Create Profile
Use this action to create a new Profile record. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT which
fields to automatically populate in the Profile record. You can populate the fields with HEAT field
values.
To Create a Create Profile Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Create Profile, then click OK. The AutoTask
Create Profile Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Create Profile action.
4 Since you are creating a Profile record, the Profile table is displayed by default in the Table
field.
5 In the Customer Type drop‐down list, select the type of record you want to create. The fields
(example: with the SupportExpDate field selected, clicking this icon opens the Select Date
be defined.
User Guide 131

AutoTasks
each.
8 Click OK.
Display Message Box

Use this action to display a message dialog box (during the AutoTask run) which can be configured to
convey information, or to enable the AutoTask, depending on conditions during the execution, to
branch off to another AutoTask action. You can include HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames,
temporary filenames, assignments, journals, or counters in the message.
You can also use this action to troubleshoot an AutoTask consisting of multiple actions by inserting a
Display Message Box action between each action of the AutoTask to confirm the desired results are
being achieved.
To Create a Display Message Box Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Display Message Box, then click OK. The
AutoTask Message Box Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Display Message Box action.
4 In the Message Box Text field, type the text that will display when the message dialog box
opens; use the formatting buttons at the top to format the message. With your cursor in the
Message Box Text field, you can also right‐click to insert HEAT field values, @Functions,
filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, or counters to configure an expression
which will resolve when the AutoTask runs.
132 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
5 In the Message Box Return Choose drop‐down list, select the response option(s) want
displayed in the message box:
• Ok
• Ok‐Cancel
• Yes‐No
If you select either Ok‐Cancel or Yes‐No, the two fields at the bottom of the dialog box enable
you to specify an AutoTask which will run when the user selects that response. Right‐click to
select an AutoTask.
6 In the Default Choose drop‐down list, select the default response (which enables the user to
just press Enter to use the default response).
7 In the Message Box Display Type drop‐down list, select the icon you want displayed (to
indicate the type of message: Exclamation, Information, Stop, or Question), or leave the
default at None.
8 In the Auto Hide Timeout field, specify the time frame the dialog box will display, awaiting a
response, before closing, or leave the default at None.
9 Click OK.
Execute External Service Request

The AutoTask action provides two external service options:
• Use this action to call a Web Service.
• Use this action to select a third‐party application to exchange information with HEAT utilizing
.NET capability.
Note: The configuration of this AutoTask requires some application
development knowledge and capability.
To Create an Execute External Service Request Action that Calls a Web Service:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Execute External Service request, then click OK.
The AutoTask External Service invocation dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Execute External Service Request action.
User Guide 133

AutoTasks
4 To populate the URL field, click the Reference button.
5 In the Service Reference dialog box, click the Web tab.
6 On the Web tab, type the Web service address in the URL field and click Go. The desired
service appears in the display (the Web services found at this URL field lists the services). Click
OK.
7 In the AutoTask External Service invocation dialog box, in the Service(Object) Name field,
select the desired service from the list of available services.
8 In the Method Info (Return value type & Name) field, select the desired function for that
service. When you select the function, the corresponding parameters will populate in the
Parameters list section.
9 In the Method Info (I‐Value) field, enter the HEAT field(s) for which you want the Web service
to return a value (in addition to those specified in the Parameter list section); either right‐click
in the field and select Insert Field, or click the Insert Field button and click Insert Field.
10 In the Insert Field dialog box, select the Table, then select the Field you want to insert in the
Method Info (I‐Value) field. Click OK.
11 In the AutoTask External Service invocation dialog box, in the drop‐down field beside the
Method Info (I‐Value) field, indicate how you want the service to process the value it returns:
• Append ‐ Add data in back of any data that may already be in the field.
• Ask ‐ Ask before making a change to the existing data.
• Insert Before ‐ Add data in front of any data that may already be in the field.
• No ‐ Write values in blank fields.
• Yes ‐ Overwrite the existing data.
12 In the Parameter list section, which populated when you selected the desired function in the
Method Info (Return value type & Name) field, you need to specify the parameter Value (and
corresponding Override Mode, if applicable). To select the parameter value, use the Value for
parameter field at the bottom of the dialog box:
a) Select the parameter, then right‐click in the Value for parameter field, or click the Insert
button to the right of that field.
Note: Some parameters may have multiple insert options (including inserting
HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, etc.); some
may have only one insert option (such as Insert Field).
134 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
b) Select the field, function, etc., you want to insert, then click the Value column of the
parameter to insert the selected value.
Note: The button to the left of the Insert button opens the AutoTask Field
Zoom dialog box, which provides a larger work area for the Value for
parameter field, if needed.
13 Click OK.
To Create an Execute External Service Request Action that Selects an Application:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Execute External Service request, then click OK.
The AutoTask External Service invocation dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Execute External Service Request action.
4 To select the application to exchange information with HEAT (this will populate the URL field),
click the Reference button.
5 In the Service Reference dialog box, click the .NET tab.
6 On the .NET tab, select the application, then click OK (or click Browse to locate the
application).
7 In the AutoTask External Service invocation dialog box, in the Service(Object) Name field,
select the desired service from the list of available services.
User Guide 135

AutoTasks
8 In the Method Info (Return value type & Name) field, select the desired function for that
service. When you select the function, the corresponding parameters will populate in the
Parameters list section.
9 In the Method Info (I‐Value) field, enter the HEAT field(s) for which you want the application to
return a value (in addition to those specified in the Parameter list section); either right‐click in
the field and select Insert Field, or click the Insert button and click Insert Field.
10 In the Insert Field dialog box, select the Table, then select the Field you want to insert in the
Method Info (I‐Value) field. Click OK.
11 In the drop‐down field beside the Method Info (I‐Value) field, indicate how you want the
service to process the value it returns:
• Append ‐ Add data in back of any data that may already be in the field.
• Insert Before ‐ Add data in front of any data that may already be in the field.
• No ‐ Write values in blank fields.
• Yes ‐ Overwrite the existing data.
12 In the Parameter list section, which populated when you selected the desired function in the
Method Info (Return value type & Name) field, you need to specify the parameter Value (and
corresponding Override Mode, if applicable). To select the parameter value, use the Value for
parameter field at the bottom of the dialog box:
a) Select the parameter, then right‐click in the Value for parameter field, or click the Insert
button to the right of that field.
Note: Some parameters may have multiple insert options (including inserting
HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, etc.); some
may have only one insert option (such as Insert Field).
b) Select the field, function, etc., you want to insert, then click the Value column of the
parameter to insert the selected value.
Note: The button to the left of the Insert button opens the AutoTask Field
Zoom dialog box, which provides a larger work area for the Value for
parameter field, if needed.
13 Click OK.
Goto Call(Ticket)
Use this action to search for a specific Call Record; performs the same action as Ctrl+G or File>Go to
Call ID, enabling you to open a specific Call Record by its Call ID. You can also use HEAT field values,
@Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, or counters to configure an
expression that identifies which call(s) to go to.
Utilizing HEAT field values, you to link calls by storing Call IDs in fields for a record, then execute the
action using a command button, which results in the stored Call Record being opened. For more
information regarding command buttons, refer to the online help topic "Add Command Buttons to
Forms" in the Administrator module online help.
Note: If you run the Go to Call AutoTask before the current Call Record has been
saved, you will be prompted to fill in all fields required to save the Call Record,
so the current call can be saved before the AutoTask runs.
136 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
To Create a Goto Call Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Goto Call(Ticket), then click OK. The AutoTask
Goto Call Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Goto Call action.
4 In the Call ID expression field, type the Call ID for the Call Record (as shown in the Call Status
Banner). With your cursor in the Call ID expression field, you can also click Insert to use HEAT
field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, or counters
to configure an expression that identifies which call(s) to go to.
5 Click OK.
HEATBoard Issue
Use this action to automatically create a HEATBoard issue. The setup dialog box mirrors the dialog box
that opens when creating a HEATBoard issue in the InfoCenter, with a few exceptions, due to the fact
that the issue is not created until the AutoTask runs.
You can include HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments,
journals, or counters in the issue.
To Create a HEATBoard Issue Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select HEATBoard Issue, then click OK. The Create new
HEATBoard Issue dialog box opens.
User Guide 137

AutoTasks
3 In the Name field, type a name for the HEATBoard issue action.
4 The Posted Information data will not populate until the AutoTask runs.
5 In the Text field, type the message content. You can also right‐click to insert HEAT field values,
@Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, or counters (which will
be calculated at run time against the current call, user, etc.).
6 In the Save to View section, save the HEATBoard issue to either the Global or Team view. If
you select Team, choose the specific team from the drop‐down list.
7 In the Linked Calls section:
• Allow Linked Calls ‐ Allows other users to link their related calls to the HEATBoard issue. If
you do not select this option, the Expiration section becomes active, enabling you to set an
expiration date/time. Use caution if setting an expiration date; if the AutoTask is run after
the expiration date passes, you will create an expired HEATBoard issue.
Note: Select Allow Linked Calls only if your issue is Call Record‐related.
• Link Current Call ‐ Links the currently active call to the HEATBoard issue. If the call is already
linked to a different HEATBoard issue, this option is unavailable since calls can only be linked
to one HEATBoard issue.
• AutoClose ‐ Allows the linked call to be closed upon resolution of the Lead Call. If you did not
select Link Current Call, this option is unavailable.
• No AutoClose ‐ The linked Call Record will not be autoclosed when the Lead Call is resolved.
If you did not select Link Current Call, this option is unavailable.
8 Click OK.
138 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
If Field is Empty Statement

Use this action to add an If statement to conditionally execute other AutoTasks if the specified field is
not populated with data. When you configure this action, you specify the field and define the true/
false responses for the statement (which AutoTasks you want to run when a true or false response is
returned).
To Create an If Field is Empty Statement Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select If Field is Empty Statement, then click OK. The If
Field is Empty Statement Definition dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the If Field is Empty Statement action.
4 Select the Table, then select the Field to be evaluated.
5 If you want an AutoTask to run or stop if the specified field is empty (a True response), select
Run Task or Stop Task, then right‐click in the True Response field (or you can click in the field,
then click Insert), and click Select AutoTask. The Select a Task dialog box opens, in which you
can select a Team or Global AutoTask. Click Save.
6 If you want an AutoTask to run or stop if the specified field is not empty (a False response),
select Run Task or Stop Task, then right‐click in the False Response field (or you can click in the
field, then click Insert), and click Select AutoTask. The Select a Task dialog box opens, in which
you can select a Team or Global AutoTask. Click Save.
7 Click OK.
If Statement
Use this action to add an if statement to conditionally execute other AutoTasks. For example, you can
use an If statement to stop your SLA clock (run Stop Clock AutoTask) if a call is suspended (status =
suspended). When you configure this action, you define the conditional statement, and the true/false
responses for the statement (which AutoTasks you want to run when a true or false response is
returned). You can incorporate HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames,
assignments, journals, counters, lines, or blank values into the conditional statement.
To Create an If Statement Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select If Statement, then click OK. The If Statement
Definition dialog box opens.
User Guide 139

AutoTasks
3 In the Title field, type a name for the If Statement action.
4 In the If field, define the if statement (for example, if status = suspended). You can also use the
Insert button to incorporate HEAT data into the statement.
5 In the True Response field, define the action you want the AutoTask to perform if the
statement is true by selecting either Run Task or Stop Task, then clicking the Insert button to
select the AutoTask you want to run or stop (for example, stop SLA Clock AutoTask).
6 In the False Response field, define the action you want the AutoTask to perform if the
statement is false by selecting either Run Task or Stop Task, then clicking the Insert button to
select the AutoTask you want to run or stop (for example, run SLA Clock AutoTask).
7 Click OK.
Jump to a Control
Use this action to place your cursor in specific field on a form. This action is best used after running
another AutoTask. For example, after you run an AutoTask that creates a new Record, the Jump to a
Control AutoTask might position the cursor in the Call Log Status field so you can change the status.
To Create a Jump to a Control Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Jump to a control, then click OK. The AutoTask
Jump to Control dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Jump to a Control action.
4 Select the Table, then select the Field into which you want the cursor to jump.
5 Click OK.
140 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
Print Information
Use this action to send selected information from a Call Record directly to the printer. You can format
text and field elements to suit a custom printout. This customization ability sets this feature apart
from the print functionality available through the main Call Logging menu bar. You can set up various
AutoTasks to send printouts to different printers. This is useful where there is a central call dispatch
operation, and the assignees are in different locations where a Call Record hard copy is required.
To Create a Print Call Ticket Information Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Print Information, then click OK. The AutoTask
Print Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Print Information action.
4 In the Printer section, select Default, or select Specify and click Printer to select another
printer, then click OK.
5 With your cursor in the section below the formatting buttons, click the Insert button to
incorporate HEAT data (mainly information from the Call Record) into your file.
6 Click Page Setup to open the Page Setup dialog box, in which you can set printing preferences.
Click OK.
7 Click OK.
Run an AutoTask
Use this action to run multiple, established AutoTasks as one Super AutoTask. The individual
AutoTasks execute in the order in which you add them, and they prompt the user for additional
information, if required.
To Create a Run an AutoTask Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Run an AutoTask, then click OK. The Select a Task
dialog box opens.
User Guide 141

AutoTasks
3 Select the AutoTask you want to run (you can filter the list by selecting a View).
4 Click Select. Your selected AutoTask is listed in the Actions section of the Add/Edit Task dialog
box.
5 Continue adding AutoTasks until you have assembled the Super AutoTask you need.
6 When you have created all needed Actions, click OK in the Add/Edit Task dialog box.
Run a Program
Use this action to launch an executable file (.exe, .com, .bat). Note that not all programs accept
arguments. For those that do, the argument may be character‐based (such as ,/p/r) or it may be a file
with an extension normally opened by that application. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT
which program to run and how. You can include HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary
filenames, assignments, journals, or counters in the filename and arguments.
To Create a Run Program Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Run a Program, then click OK. The AutoTask Run
Program Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Run a Program action.
142 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
4 In the Filename field, type the path to the executable (.exe, .com, .bat) you want the AutoTask
to run, or click Browse to navigate to the program.
5 If your program requires additional information to run, type it in the Arguments field. Click the
Insert button to insert HEAT data into the argument.
Note: You can add an argument line to those application executables able to
handle additional launch information. This includes any input a program needs
to run. For example, if you have a program that dials a pager, the program may
require the pager number as an argument. An argument can be character‐
based (for example, /p /r) or it may be a file with an extension normally opened
by that application.
6 In the Working Directory field, type a path to a directory where the executable can perform
calculations or create temporary files if it requires space to do so.
7 If you want the program to wait a period of time after it runs (if, for example, you need to
pause between multiple AutoTasks or after a phone number is dialed), type the number of
seconds you want the program to wait in the Pause after running field.
8 If you want the system to wait for the program to terminate before returning you to Call
Logging, select the Wait for the program to terminate check box.
9 If you want the system to save the Call Record before the program runs, select the Save data
before starting program check box.
10 If you want the system to refresh the Call Record after the program runs, select the Reload
data from database when program terminates check box.
11 Click OK.
Send a Broadcast
Use this action to send a HEAT Broadcast message and, if needed, an attached Call Record to every
person in your Mail Group. The Broadcast message pops up on every user's screen. If there is no
active Call Record to attach, the AutoTask ignores the attach command and continues with the other
actions defined in the AutoTask. When you configure this action, you author the Broadcast message,
and tell HEAT whether or not to attach the current, active Call Record to the message.
To Create a Send a Broadcast Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Send a Broadcast, then click OK. The Send
Broadcast Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Send a Broadcast action.
User Guide 143

AutoTasks
4 To attach the current, active Call Record to the Broadcast message, select the Attach Current
Call check box.
5 In the Subject field, type a subject for the broadcast message.
6 In the Note section, type the Broadcast message.
7 Click OK.
Send a Message
Use this action to send a mail message through SupportMail or any mail protocol used in Call Logging:
POP/SMTP, MAPI, Lotus, and GroupWise email systems. When you configure this action, you type the
email and configure options for sending the message. You can include HEAT field values (such as data
from the currently active record), @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments,
journals, or counters in the subject or body of the email. Use this AutoTask to set up an email
message to send a verification, send a courtesy note to a customer that their call is being handled,
remind a technician to contact a customer, or forward a message if the original message was not read
after a specific period of time.
To Create a Send Message Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Send a Message, then click OK. The AutoTask
Send Mail Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Send a Message action.
4 Click Address button to specify a From email address, if needed. The Address Book dialog box
opens. In the Mail System drop‐down list, select the desired mail system (use HEAT for
SupportMail or use any other mail protocol supported in Call Logging, as appropriate for
external mail), then select a name from the list. Click OK. Do the same for the To field. You can
also specify a CC email address, a BCC, and a Reply To address, if needed.
144 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
5 In the Subject field, type a descriptive subject. You can also right‐click the field or click the
Insert button to incorporate HEAT data, such as HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames,
temporary filenames, assignments, journals, or counters, into the subject line (refer to
"Inserting HEAT Values" for details).
6 Select the Message Format: either HTML or Plain Text.
If you select HTML, you have access to the following message formatting options in the
formatting toolbar:
• Modify font, font size, font style, font color
• Add highlight color.
• Align left, center, right, or justify.
• Add numbering or bullets.
• Decrease or increase indent.
• Add a hyperlink:
» Click the Hyperlink button to open the Edit Link dialog box.
» Type a label if desired; the email recipient will see (and click) this text instead of the
URL. You can right‐click and insert HEAT Fields and Functions, if needed.
» In the Link Target field, type the URL. You can right‐click and insert HEAT Fields and
Functions, if needed.
• Add a picture to the message (click the Image button). If you add a picture, you can
specify Alternate Text (which appears when pictures are loading or are missing),
alignment, spacing around the picture, and add a border (specify point size).
Note: If you change the email format after typing the email message in the
Note field, you will see a warning message indicating that changing the email
format will erase all content from the Note field. Click OK to proceed; click
Cancel to cancel the format change and maintain the content.
7 In the Note field, type the message text. You can also right‐click the field or click the Insert
button to incorporate HEAT data into the note:
• Insert HEAT Field ‐ Select a Table and Field; if you select the Asgnmnt or Journal table, you
will be asked to specify which assignment/journal (Current, First, or Last).
• Insert Function ‐ This @Functions () Definitions dialog box differs slightly from the
@Function() Definitions dialog box displayed in other AutoTasks, but the function settings
remain the same. Instead of fields, there is an edit pane on the right in which you can
configure the various functions that require additional configuration. Refer to "@Functions"
for an explanation of each function and its settings.
8 If you want to automatically forward the email (if it remains unread for a specific period of
time), click Forward If Unread. The Forward if Unread dialog box opens, in which you can
select a forwarding recipient, a time increment after which the message will be forwarded,
and a calendar to control the timing. Click OK.
9 You can attach one or more files to the email. Click the Attach button to select one of the
following options:
• File ‐ Select one or more files to attach to the email (press and hold the Ctrl key while
selecting multiple files). Move your cursor over the file name link of attached files to see the
file path.
User Guide 145

AutoTasks
• Computed link ‐ Enables you to select a file to attach, then insert a field, @Functions, etc.,
into the file name, which resolves when the AutoTask is run.
You can right‐click an attached file and select Edit to edit that file (click Insert to insert a field,
@Functions, etc.) or replace it with another file (click Browse). To delete a file, right‐click the
file and select Delete.
10 If you want to attach the currently active Call Record, select the Attach Current Call check box.
11 If you want a copy of the AutoTask Send Mail Action forwarded to your Outbox as a record of
the event, select the Save to Outbox check box.
12 If you want to be prompted before the email is sent, select the Prompt the user before
sending check box. If selected, this causes the Compose Message dialog box to open when the
AutoTask is run, enabling you to edit the email and message options, if needed. You can also
cancel rather than send the message; if you choose to cancel, the AutoTask Warning dialog
box will open, apprising you that the message was not sent.
13 Click OK.
Update Call
Use this action to update an existing Call Record by appending or populating fields. When you
configure this action, you tell HEAT which forms and fields to automatically update in the Call Record
(a Call Record is made up of five forms: Assignment, CallLog, Detail, Journal, and Subset). You can
update the fields with HEAT field values,@Functions, counters, filenames, or blank values.
To Create an Update Call Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Update Call, then click OK. The AutoTask Update
Call Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Update Call action.
• Close call ‐ The AutoTask attempts to close the call. Ensure all the closing required fields are
populated. If not, the Call Record does not close and a message displays explaining the
reason(s).
reason(s).
5 In the Table drop‐down list, select the type of record you want to update:
• Asgnmnt
• CallLog
• Detail
• Journal
• Subset
146 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
6 In the list of fields, select the field you want to update when you run the AutoTask. Selecting a
field activates one or more of the adjacent controls: the additional configuration icon
(example: with the CallLog ClosedDate field selected, clicking this icon opens the Select Date
be defined.
each.
8 Click OK.
Update Configuration
Use this action to update an existing Configuration record by appending or populating fields. When
you configure this action, you tell HEAT which values to automatically update in the Configuration
record. You can update the fields with HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary
filenames, assignments, journals, counters, lines, or blank values.
To Create an Update Configuration Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Update Configuration, then click OK. The
AutoTask Update Configuration Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Update Configuration action.
4 Since you are creating a Configuration record, the Config table is displayed by default in the
Table field.
5 In the Configuration Type drop‐down list, select the type of record you want to update. The
fields for the selected Configuration Type appear in the Fields list.
6 In the list of Fields, select the fields you want to update when you run the AutoTask. Selecting
(example: with the Equipment PurchaseDate field selected, clicking this icon opens the Select
Date dialog box), the Validate button or the Insert button. You can click Validate or Insert to
define the data that will populate the field. All required fields (identified by a lightning bolt
icon) must be defined.
User Guide 147

AutoTasks
each.
8 Click OK.
Update Contact
Use this action to update an existing Contact record by appending or populating fields. When you
configure this action, you tell HEAT which fields to automatically update in the Contact record. You
can update the fields with HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames,
assignments, journals, counters, lines, or blank values.
To Create an Update Contact Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Update Contact, then click OK. The AutoTask
Update Contact Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Update Contact action.
4 In the Customer Type drop‐down list, select the type of record you want to update. The fields
(example: with the Notes field selected, clicking this icon opens the AutoTask Field Zoom
be defined.
each.
7 Click OK.
148 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
Update Customer Login

Use this action to update an existing Customer Login. When you configure this action, you tell HEAT
which fields to automatically populate in the Customer Login. You can update the fields with HEAT
field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, counters, lines, or
blank values.
To Create an Update Customer Login Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Update Customer Login, then click OK. The
AutoTask Update Customer Login Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Update Customer Login action.
4 The HEATCAI table displays in the Table field by default. This table stores all customer login
information. The fields in the HEATCAI table appear in the Fields list.
(example: with the SupportExpDate field selected, clicking this icon opens the Select Date
be defined.
each.
7 Click OK.
Update Profile
Use this action to update an existing Profile record by appending or populating fields. When you
configure this action, you tell HEAT which fields to automatically update in the Profile record. You can
update the fields with HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments,
journals, counters, lines, or blank values.
To Create an Update Profile Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Update Profile, then click OK. The AutoTask
Update Profile Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Update Profile action.
User Guide 149

AutoTasks
4 Since you are creating a Profile record, the Profile table is displayed by default in the Table
field.
5 In the Profile Type drop‐down list, select the type of record you want to update. The fields for
the selected Profile Type appear in the Fields list.
6 In the list of Fields, select the fields you want to update when you run the AutoTask. You can
click Validate or Insert to define the data that will populate the field. All required fields
(identified by a lightning bolt icon) must be defined.
each.
8 Click OK.
Web Browse
Use this action to launch a Web page: the page can be opened within Call Logging (multiple Web
pages can be opened on the Web tab), in a browser outside of the HEAT system, or the system can
simply pass data to a Web site without opening the Web page. If needed, this action can be used to
transfer data from the Call Record to the Web page. For example, an AutoTask could be created to
open the Google Web site and transfer information from the Call Record as the search criteria.
To Create a Web Browse Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Web Browse, then click OK. The AutoTask Web
browse dialog box opens.
150 HEAT
AutoTask Actions
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Web Browse action.
4 In the Web Browser use to navigate URL field:
• Call Logging internal browser ‐ Opens the Web page on a tab on the Web tab in HEAT Call
Logging.
• External browser ‐ Opens the browser outside of the HEAT system.
5 If you selected the Call Logging internal browser option in the Web Browser use to navigate
URL field, use the Internal browser usage method field to configure how the browser will
display:
• Open target URL in new tab ‐ The Web page opens in a new tab; if a Web page is already
open, you will see an additional tabbed Web page display on the Web tab.
• Reload first open tab ‐ The page will refresh the existing tab (or open in the first Web tab if
multiple tabs are open).
• Clear all tabs before navigate ‐ Clears all open Web tabs and opens the Web page in a new
tab.
6 In the Page URL field, type (or copy/paste) the Web page address.
7 To use a form on the Web page to submit information, select the Submit a form from the
specified PageURL check box. The fields below the check box become active, enabling you to
specify the URL for the forma action,
8 To autofill the fields below the Submit a form from the specified PageURL check box, click the
Auto Fill Fields Below button, then click OK. Otherwise, go to step 13.
9 The Web Browse AutoTask dialog box opens, displaying the specified Web page. The Select
Form from the list field lists any form(s) on the Web page that are detected. Select the specific
form you want to populate with HEAT data. In most cases, the specified field flashes in the Web
page so you can confirm this is the desired field.
10 In the Web page display, in the desired field, type any text as a placeholder, then click OK. The
Web Browse AutoTask dialog box closes, returning you to the AutoTask Web browse dialog
box. Note that the Form Action URL, the POST data or Get query string data, and Request
method fields have been autopopulated.
Note: Before clicking OK on the Web Browse AutoTask dialog box, you may
need to perform additional actions on the Web page before submitting the
form (such a selecting a check box to remember a password).
User Guide 151

AutoTasks
11 In the POST data or Get query string data field, locate and highlight the placeholder text, then
right‐click the to insert HEAT field values, @Functions, filenames, temporary filenames,
assignments, journals, or counters to specify the HEAT data which will populate the Web form
field.
12 Click OK.
13 Proceed with steps 12 through 16 only if you did not click the Auto Fill Fields Below button in
step 8. In the Form Action URL field, type the URL for the form action.
14 In the POST data or Get query string data field, you will create an expression that specifies the
field to be populated on the Web page as well as the data from the Call Record which will
populate that field.
15 Right‐click in the POST data or Get query string data field to insert HEAT field values,
@Functions, filenames, temporary filenames, assignments, journals, or counters to specify the
HEAT data which will populate the Web form field.
16 The Request method check box refers to the method (protocol) used by the HTTP server to
transfer data: the POST or GET method. Select the appropriate method for the Web page.
17 Click OK.
Write a File to Disk

Use this action to capture Call Record information in a file or temporary file format. You can then use
the file as an argument for some other executable to process, or it can remain as a text record of
selected data fields from the call. This function is often used in conjunction with other actions in a
more complex AutoTask. In the first action, data is written to a file. Afterward, another application
digests this file data in order to perform a different operation.
To Create a Write a File to Disk Action:
2 In the Specify Action Type dialog box, select Write a File to Disk, then click OK. The AutoTask
Write File Action dialog box opens.
3 In the Title field, type a name for the Write a File action.
4 In the Filename field, type the path to the directory where you want the file to reside, or click
Browse to navigate to a location.
152 HEAT
Inserting HEAT Values
5 Select Write in RTF Format to allow font and formatting options. If you select the Write in RTF
Format check box, the Append to existing file option becomes unavailable.
6 If you enter a non‐variable file name, you can select Append to existing file and add additional
text to the file every time the AutoTask runs.
7 With your cursor in the File Contents section, click the Insert button to insert HEAT data
(usually information from the Call Record or Call Group) into the file.
8 Click OK.

You may need to insert a value from HEAT into an AutoTask action rather than manually enter a value. Use
the Insert button (which appears in most AutoTask dialog boxes), or right‐click a text field to open a
shortcut menu listing available options (the options displayed depend on the field into which you are
inserting a value):
Note: Some @Functions can also be inserted into a Boolean expression when
defining Call Groups and Customer Groups. Refer to the @Function Table for
details.
• Insert Field
• Insert Function
• Insert Filename
• Insert Temporary Filename
• Insert All Assignments/Insert All Journals
• Insert Blank Value
• Insert New Line
• Insert Counter
Insert Field
Inserts a field value into an AutoTask, which is a convenient way to populate AutoTask email
messages, alerts, arguments for executables, and for formatting printed output so it contains data
elements from the current record.
To Insert a Field Value:
1 Either click the Insert button (when available) or right‐click the text field, and select the Insert
Field menu option. The Insert Field dialog box opens.
2 In the Table drop‐down list, you can select from all of the database tables pertaining to the Call
Record: Call Log, Subset, Detail, Profile, Asgnmnt, Journal. Select a Table.
3 When you select a table, all of the fields specific to that table are made available so you can
populate fields in the AutoTask with their values. Select a Field.
Note: If you select a date field (such as ClosedDate), a field displays enabling
you to select a date format.
4 If you selected the Asgnmnt or Journal table, you will be asked to specify which assignment/
journal (Current, First, or Last).
User Guide 153

AutoTasks
5 If you select the check box at the bottom of the Insert Field dialog box, entitled When running
for a group, should information come from the starting record in the group (instead of from
the current record being modified), an AutoTask run for an entire group will run based on the
field value it finds in the first record in the group rather the record currently being modified.
6 Click OK.
Insert Function
Inserts @Functions into the AutoTask.
@Functions
@Functions are expressions that capture continually changing variables, such as the current date
or time. Use an @Function in an AutoTask (or in a Boolean expression for creating Call Groups and
Customer Groups) to define actions and search criteria.The list of available @Functions varies by
situation. For example, the @Functions available for use in an AutoTask may differ from the
@Functions available in a Boolean expression
@Calculation Function
The @Calculation function allows you to perform mathematical operations or change the way
data displays. It can be used alone but is also used in conjunction with the @timeadd function
and all string functions; the system automatically inserts the @Calculation function when the
@timeadd and string functions are used.
Examples: you can take an email ID using upper and lowercase letters and create an AutoTask that
inserts it in a field using only lowercase letters (the system inserts the @Calculation when you
select the @strlower function) = {|@Functions.@Calculation|strlower({|Subset.EMailID})|}. Or, you might
need to perform a mathematical function using values of a purchase order as the variables =
{|@Functions.@Calculation|{|Detail.Cost1}+{|Detail.Cost2} +{|Detail.Cost3}.
Math Operators/Functions
The @Calculation function uses the following Math Operators:
Math Operator/Function Description
+, ‐, *, and / Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.
( ) Parenthesis designating order of operations.
abs(), cos(), round(), sin(), Absolute, cosine, rounding, sine, square root, and tangent.
sqrt(), tan() The absolute function (abs) always returns a positive value.
Trigonometry functions (cos, sin, tan) assume radians.
The rounding function (round) enables you to round numbers to a
meaningful size. For example, when tax is calculated, the value
returned often includes too many places after the decimal point:
523.7461. The rounding function allows you to round to the nearest
decimal to create a traditional monetary value: 523.75.
Example: {|@Functions.@Calculation|round({|Detail.TaxCost},2)|}
The integer 2 tells the calculation to round the output to the
hundredth’s place (two digits after the decimal point).
154 HEAT
Use Restrictions
Some restrictions exist when using @Calculations, and @Functions in general:
• You cannot nest functions; that is, you cannot put one function inside another function.
• You cannot put a text string into a date field; the data you put in a function must be
specifically formatted for that particular function. If it is not formatted correctly, you will
receive an error message.
• You must separate the day value from time values with a comma.
• You must separate the values within a time sequence with a minus sign or a plus sign.
• You can not execute multiple mathematical operations within the same @Calculation.
@Function Table
The following table lists @Functions that are used in AutoTask actions, and in the New Call Group
and New Customer Group dialog boxes. Many functions have a define button to open a dialog
box for additional configuration. For others, a Format field displays or a field is provided for
specifying a needed value:
@Function Description Example
@AllResolved() Inserts a T (true) or F (false) in a defined Populate a field on the Call Log form with T

field if all Assignments are resolved. or F to indicate if all Assignments are
resolved. This field could then be used to
report or escalate Call Records that should
be closed.
@Calculation Inserts a mathematical operation. Also, the Add columns in a Purchase Order:

system automatically prefaces the timeadd {|@Functions.@Calculation|{|Detail.Cost1}+
function and string functions with the {|Detail.Cost2} +{|Detail.Cost3}|}
@Calculation function.
• Click the Define button.
• Insert fields, operators, math functions
to create your equation.
• Click the Check button to verify your
equation syntax is correct.
• Click OK.
@Credentials An encrypted login string that inserts all Run a Quick Update for HEAT link to LDAP

credentials needed to access HEAT. by creating a Run a Program AutoTask that
includes @Credentials (for example, CustID)
that provide access for the update to occur
in the HEAT database.
@CurrentDate Inserts the current date from the Insert today's date in the Asgnmnt table

workstation clock. Target Date field.
• Select the desired date format in the
Format field.
@Current Time Inserts the current time from the Insert the current time in the Asgnmnt table

workstation clock. Target Time field.
@Date() When used in defining a Call or Customer Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call

Group, inserts the current date from the Records closed today:
workstation clock. {CallLog.ClosedDate}=@Date()
User Guide 155

AutoTasks
@DateAdjust() Adjusts the current date by the specified AutoTask Example

amount for a specified calendar (can also Specify assignments must be resolved in 3
be used in defining Call/Customer Groups; days by adding three days to the current
refer to the Example column). date in the Asgnmnt table Target Date field.
• Select the desired date format in the This example uses the Assignment date and
Format field. time values for the last assignment:
• Click the Define button. {|@Functions.@DateAdjust()|3,Days,7 Day x 24
Hour,,{|Asgnmnt.DateAssign.L},
• In the Adjust by section, specify the time
{|Asgnmnt.TimeAssign.L}|}
frame by which the date will be adjusted
(for example, Time = 3, Increment = Call Group Example
Days) Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call
• If needed, in the Adjust based on Records with an Assignment Target Date
section, specify the date and time fields one week from today’s date:
on which the adjustment will be made; {Asgnmnt.TargetDate} = @DateAdjust( YY, MM,
right‐click to select Insert Field; in the +7)
Insert Field dialog box, you can also
specify Current, First, or Last assignment.
• Select the calendar.
• Click OK.
@datediff() Establishes the time difference between A typical date/time difference function

two dates or date/time combinations. The might look like this:
value returned is always positive and is {|@Functions.@datediff()|{|Asgnmnt.DateAssign},
formatted as: 000,HH:MM:SS. To calculate {|Asgnmnt.TimeAssign},{|Asgnmnt.DateResolv},
only the number of elapsed days, the value {|Asgnmnt.TimeResolv},7 Day x 24 Hour,|}
is returned formatted as 000. Calculates the difference between the time
• Click the Define button. (day, hour, minute, second value) a Call
Ticket was assigned and the time (day, hour,
• Specify the Start and End Date, and/or
minute, second value) it was resolved. If a
the Start and End Time. You can right‐
call was assigned on March 5 at 2:36:00 PM,
click or click the Insert button to insert
and it was resolved on March 12 at 8:30:15
HEAT values. In the examples HEAT fields
AM, the value returned is: 006,17:54:00.
were used:
A typical date difference function might
Start Date = Asgnmnt.DateAssign, End
look like this:
Date = Asgnmnt.DateResolv, etc.
{|@Functions.@datediff()|{|CallLog.RecvdDate},,
• Select the calendar. {|CallLog.ClosedDate},,7 Day x 24 Hour,|}
• Click OK. If a call is received on June 6, and then
closed on November 28, the value returned
is: 175.
@DDERequest() Creates a textual data exchange between Take information from a Call Record and

two software packages that support DDE. populate an Excel spreadsheet.
Integration and setup options for DDE
processes vary according to application
and vendor, so you should contact your
Sales Representative for a list of certified
vendors or contact the HEAT Support Desk
for more information.
156 HEAT
@If() Evaluates a statement (or value) as true or Update the Priority field in a Call Record

false, then conditionally fills in a field. with one defined value if the SLA Class is
• Click the Define button. GOLD and another if it is not GOLD.
• In the If field, insert fields, functions,
operators to build your expression.
• In the True/False Response fields, specify
the outcome if the expression is true and
if it is false.
• Click OK.
@MHTransferDate() When used in defining a Call or Customer Check the last day data was received from a

Group, returns the date the MobileHEAT Mobile HEAT user.
instance was last synched.
@MHTransferTime() When used in defining a Call or Customer Check the last time data was received from

Group, returns the time the MobileHEAT a Mobile HEAT user.
instance was last synched.
@NoAssignments() When used in defining a Call or Customer Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call

Group, returns records with no Records without Assignments
Assignments.
@NoJournal() When used in defining a Call or Customer Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call

Group, returns records with no Journal Records without any Journal Entries.
entries.
@Prompt() Displays a field for user entry (can also be AutoTask Example

used in defining Call/Customer Groups; Prompt a user to enter a Call Type to
refer to the Example column). retrieve Call Records:
• Type the prompt text in the field {|@Functions.@Prompt()|Please enter a Call Type}
provided.
• Click OK. Call Group Example
The same example can be used when
creating a Call Group; all Call Records with
the specified Call Type will be retrieved:
{CallLog.CallType} = @Prompt('Please enter a Call
Type')
@ReadFile() Inserts the contents of a text file or HEAT Insert a phone list in a .txt format into an

field. email message:
• Click the Define button. {|@Functions.@ReadFile()|C:\My documents\
• Type the file path and name or browse to Phone list.txt|}
the file location.
• You can also insert HEAT values.
• Click OK.
User Guide 157

AutoTasks
@Role() Inserts the role of the current user. Create an If Statement AutoTask based on a

role. For example, if a user has the
Administrator role, a specified AutoTask will
run; if not, nothing will occur. In the If
Statement Definition dialog box for the If
Statement AutoTask action, the If field
might look like this:
{|@Functions.@Role()}==Administrator
@strconcat() Links two or more fields (concatenate). A typical string concatenation function

• Click the Define button. might look like this:
• Insert fields and operators to create your {|@Functions.@Calculation|strconcat(ABC - +
equation. {|CallLog. CallID})|}
The output would look like this:
ABC-00000012
The string function successfully combined
• Click OK. the text element ABC‐ with the value in the
CallID field of the CallLog table.
@strlower() Generates output in all lowercase letters. A typical string lowercase function might

• Click the Define button. look like this:
• Insert fields and operators to create your {|@Functions.@Calculation|strlower
equation. ({|Subset.EMailID})|}
Given the input of AHawker@global.net,
the output would look like this:
ahawker@global.net
• Click OK.
@strsub() Accesses a substring. if you only want the first 5 characters of a

• Click the Define button. field, you can construct the @Calculation to
• Insert fields and operators to create your extract those characters. A typical substring
equation. function might look like this:
{|@Functions.@Calculation|strsub
({|CallLog.Category},0,5)|}
Note the first character in a string is the
• Click OK. zero position.Given the input of Break/Fix,
the output would look like this:
Break
@strtriml() Removes white space from the beginning A typical string trim left function might look

of a string. like this:
• Click the Define button. {|@Functions.@Calculation|strtriml
• Insert fields and operators to create your ({|CallLog.CloseDesc})|}
equation. This string function ensures that no white
space appears at the beginning of the Close
Description in the Call Ticket.
• Click OK.
158 HEAT
@strtrimr() Removes white space from the end of a A typical string trim right function might

string. look like this:
• Click the Define button. {|@Functions.@Calculation|strtrimr
• Insert fields and operators to create your ({|CallLog.CloseDesc})|}
equation. This string function ensures that no white
space appears at the end of the Close
Description in the Call Ticket.
• Click OK.
@strupper() Generates output in all uppercase letters. A typical string uppercase function might

• Click the Define button. look like this:
• Insert fields and operators to create your {|@Functions.@Calculation|strupper
equation. ({|CallLog.SLAUrgency})|}
Given the input of priority1, the output
would look like this:
PRIORITY1
• Click OK.
@SumAssignments Calculates the sum of numeric values in a Calculate the total time required to

specified Assignment field. Values must be complete all the work identified in the
whole numbers. assignment for a selected Call Record using
the TotalAsgnmntTime field:
{|@Functions.@SumAssignments|
(TotalAsgnmntTime)}
@SumJournals Calculates the sum of numeric values in a Calculate the total time required to

specified Journal field. Values must be complete all the work identified in the
whole numbers. journals for a selected Call Record using the
TotalJournalTime field:
{|@Functions.@SumJournals|(TotalJournalTime)}
@Team() Returns a list of team memberships for the Similar to the @Role() function.

current user. Create an If Statement AutoTask based on
team membership. For example, an IT team
member can only reassign an assignment to
a member of the same team. In the If
Statement Definition dialog box for the If
Statement AutoTask action, the If field
might look like this:
{|@Functions.@Team()}==IT
@Time() When used in defining a Call or Customer Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call

Group, inserts the current time from the Records closed yesterday before the
workstation clock. current time:
{CallLog.ClosedDate}=@DateAdjust(0,0,-1) AND
{CallLog.ClosedTime}<=@Time()
User Guide 159

AutoTasks
@timeadd() Calculates duration (how long it takes for Calculate the total time spent on resolving

an event to occur).The value returned is both Assignments and Journals:
always positive and is formatted as: {|@Functions.@Calculation|timeadd({|Asgnmnt.
000,HH:MM:SS. TotalAsgnmntTime}+{|Journal.
• Click the Define button. TotalJournalTime})|}
• Insert fields and operators to create your
equation.
• Click OK.
@TimeAdjust() Adjusts the current time by a specified AutoTask Example

amount based upon a specified calendar Add 12 hours to the current time in the
(can also be used in defining Call/Customer Asgnmnt table Target Date field:
Groups; refer to the Example column). {|@Functions.@TimeAdjust()|12,Hours,7 Day x 24
• Click the Define button. Hour,|}
• In the Adjust by section, specify the time
Call Group Example
frame by which the date will be adjusted
Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call
(for example, Time = 12, Increment =
Records with an Assignment Target Time
Hours)
greater than or equal to 8 hours from the
• In the Adjust based on section, specify current time:
the date and time fields on which the {Asgnmnt.TargetTime} >= @TimeAdjust(+8, MM)
adjustment will be made; right‐click to
select Insert Field; in the Insert Field
dialog box, you can also specify Current,
First, or Last assignment.
• Click OK.
@timediff() Calculates the difference between two A typical time difference function might

different times when the date is the same. look like this:
The value returned is always positive and is {|@Functions.@timediff()|,{|Asgnmnt.TimeAssign}
formatted as: 000,HH:MM:SS. ,,{|Asgnmnt.TimeResolv},7 Day x 24 Hour,|}
• Click the Define button. Since this is a If a call is received and assigned at 9:36:12
time difference calculation, only the Start AM and is then resolved at 4:17:28 PM of
and End Time fields are available. the same day, the value returned is:
000,06:41:00
• Specify the time fields on which the
calculation will be made; right‐click to
select Insert Field; in the Insert Field
dialog box, you can also specify Current,
First, or Last assignment.
• Click OK.
@TrackerSupervisor() Inserts the ID of the current Tracker's Create a new assignment for the Tracker's

supervisor. supervisor when an open Assignment is
past the Target Date.
@UnAcknowledged When used in defining a Call or Customer Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call

Assignments() Group, returns records that have Records with unacknowledged
unacknowledged Assignments. Assignments.
160 HEAT
@Unresolved When used in defining a Call or Customer Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call

Assignments() Group, returns records that have Records with unresolved Assignments.
unresolved Assignments.
@UserID() Inserts the current Tracker's login ID (can AutoTask Example

also be used in defining Call/Customer Insert the Tracker's login ID into the
Groups; refer to the Example column). Acknowledged User ID field on an
Assignment by using the @UserID() function
in the WhoResolv field on the Asgnmnt
table.
Call Group Example
Create a Call Group that retrieves all Call
Records resolved by the current user:
{Asgnmnt.WhoResolv} = @UserID()
@ValidatedPrompt() Displays a prompt with a list of validated AutoTask Example

values for selection (can also be used in Prompt a user to enter the appropriate
defining Call/Customer Groups; refer to code upon resolving an assignment:
the Example column). {|@Functions.@ValidatedPrompt()|Enter
• Type the prompt text in the Prompt field. Appropriate Resolution Code,Resolve,System,
ResCode}
• Select the validation Table and Field
Name (Type field is auto‐filled).
Call Group Example
• Click OK. The same example can be used when
creating a Call Group; all Call Records with
the specified Resolution Code will be
retrieved:
{Asgnmnt.Resolution} = @ValidatedPrompt('Enter
Appropriate Resolution Code', Resolve, System,
ResCode)
Edit @Functions
You can edit @Functions: double‐click the calculation and the Token Editor dialog box opens, in
which you can make changes as needed.
Insert Filename
Inserts a filename into an AutoTask. For example, if you want to page an employee when a certain
client calls, you can set up an AutoTask to perform the page. By providing a file with further
instructions, however, you can include the name of the contact who is calling as well as the contact's
phone number. Because you are including field information derived directly from the Call Record in
question in your filename function, each time you run the AutoTask with the instructions you set up
for Filename 1, the current contact and the corresponding phone number appear on the employee's
pager, no matter how many contacts might call from that company. As a result, when you select Insert
Filename>Filename 1, you create and save a function you can later use in any AutoTask. The system
saves a record of having run the AutoTask and its associated file in the HEAT directory on the local
hard drive, which appears as HFW###. Filename 1 becomes a repository for your set of instructions
and eliminates the need to perform a Save as operation each time an AutoTask utilizing it is run.
User Guide 161

AutoTasks
Insert Temporary Filename

Inserts a temporary filename into an AutoTask. The mechanism for creating and using temporary
filenames is identical to using the Insert Filename function, except the file is not permanently saved
to the local hard drive and exists only during the AutoTask run. After the AutoTask runs all of its
associated actions, the temporary file is deleted, and therefore should not be used as an attachment
to an email within an AutoTask. While in use, the temporary file is stored on the local hard drive in the
temporary directory (for example: C:\temp\HFW413.tmp).
Insert All Assignments/Insert All Journals

Inserts Assignment or Journal information into an AutoTask. You can create an AutoTask to include
information from all of the Assignments or Journal entries associated with a specific Call Record. You
might want to create such an AutoTask where alarm, printing, and email functions are concerned. You
can also edit the way this information displays:
1 In the Add/Edit Task dialog box, click Edit Blocks. The Edit Assignment/Journal Blocks dialog
box opens.
2 You can rearrange the incoming information from the Assignments/Journal entries, apply
formatting (such as fonts, point size, bold, italics, underline, and alignment), insert text, or use
the Insert button to add fields, functions, file names, temporary file names, counters.
3 Click OK.
Insert Blank Value

Inserts a blank value into an AutoTask. If used, set the overwrite column in the Fields table of the
AutoTask action dialog box to Yes to ensure the blank value is always inserted.
Insert New Line

Inserts a line break (carriage return) into an AutoTask. If the {|CR} character is inserted in the text of a
memo field, the output reflects the designated line breaks.
Insert Counter
Inserts a counter into an AutoTask. This allows the user to select a predefined counter as the value
inserted into a field defined in the AutoTask. The counter function generates a number based on an
existing counter.
When you select Insert Counter, several options appear in the subsequent shortcut menu. These
counter options are predefined by your system administrator. You are limited to the counters
appearing in that shortcut list although you can make formatting changes as indicated:
If you select Format Counter, the Format Counter dialog box opens:
1 Select the type of counter you want to format.
2 Indicate if the counter will increment.
3 Indicate if you want to insert leading zeros.
4 Indicate if you want to insert commas, decimal points, or some other character, into numbers.
5 Click OK.
162 HEAT
12
You can customize Call Logging in the following ways:
• Set User Preferences
• Customize/Create Toolbars
• Perform Table Maintenance
Set User Preferences

You can set user preferences to help tailor the look and feel of Call Logging on your own desktop. These
preferences are associated with your login.
• General Tab ‐ Set the ITSM Home URL. Add, edit, remove, specify default for Internet search
providers.
• Display Preferences ‐ Display, tracker, and keystroke options.
• Grid Settings ‐ Grid settings for Call History, Journal entry, Assignment, and Configuration
forms.
• SupportMail Preferences ‐ Polling, alarm, label, and message options.
• MAPI/Lotus Preferences ‐ MAPI and Lotus user ID, password, and mail options.
• GroupWise Preferences ‐ GroupWise user ID, password and mail options.
• POP/SMTP Preferences ‐ POP/SMTP user ID, password, and mail options.
• Location Preferences ‐ Time zone offset and default database options.
• Path Preferences ‐ Knowledge base and reporting paths.
• Sound Preferences ‐ Noise alerts associated with events.
• Prompt Preferences ‐ Autosave prompts and options.
• HEATBoard Preferences ‐ HEATBoard issue sorting, team selection, and team consolidation.
• Call Map Preferences ‐ Available categories and show/hide options.
If your administrator has configured HEAT to work with GoldMine, the FrontRange Solutions product
designed to support sales, marketing and customer service business needs, you will see two additional
tabs:
• Sales/Marketing Links ‐ Specifies the GoldMine location so it can be launched directly from Call
Logging; set GoldMine display and logon options.
• Sales Alerts ‐ Settings to display GoldMine alerts for GoldMine customers.
General Tab
To Set the General Tab Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences. The General tab settings display.
164 HEAT
2 In the ITSM Home section, if HEAT has been configured to work with ITSM, you can specify an
ITSM Home URL (which can be accessed from the ITSM menu option); the default is the
FrontRange Solutions Home page.
3 In the Internet Search section, three Internet search providers are available to use for the
Internet search function (refer to "Search Internet" for details). You can add, edit, remove
search providers. You can also specify the search provider default.
• To add a search provider to the list, click Add. The Add New Internet Search Provider dialog
box opens:
» In the Search Service Provider Name field, type a name to identify this provider.
» In the Search Service Provider URL field, type the URL for the provider (you must include
the {searchTerms} macro in order for the search to use text from the Call Logging field;
contact your IT department for assistance).
» Select the Use as default check box to specify this provider as the default.
» Click OK to close the Add New Internet Search Provider dialog box.
• To edit a search provider, select the provider then click Edit. The Edit Internet Search
Provider dialog box opens. Make any changes needed, including specifying this provider as
the default, then click OK to close the Edit Internet Search Provider dialog box.
• To remove a search provider, select the provider, then click Remove.
• To specify a default, select the check box next to the search provider.
• To restore the original three Internet search providers and remove any additional providers
you may have added, click the Restore Defaults button.
4 Click OK.
User Guide 165

Display Preferences
The settings you manipulate on this tab are workstation‐specific; they are not associated with the
user. To activate the settings, you may need to exit Call Logging and re‐launch the application.
To Set Display Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Display tab.
2 Select from the check box options at the top of the dialog box:
• AutoSize Subset ‐ The Subset size automatically adjusts to display all of its fields.
• Maximize Group Windows ‐ The Call Logging window is automatically maximized.
• Use Windows colors for forms ‐ The user's desktop color scheme, applied in the Windows
Display Properties dialog box, is implemented in Call Logging.
• Always Display All Validation Values ‐ All legal values are displayed when non‐legal values
are typed into a Validated field. If this option is not selected, no legal entries appear; the user
must search for them.
3 In the Auto‐Show Call History section, you can choose to have a customer's Call History
display when you open a new Call Record for that customer:
• Selecting Show Call History on new calls enables the customer Call History to be displayed
when a new Call Record is created.
• If you select the first option, the second option becomes available: If an existing call is
selected, abandon new call without asking, which causes Call Logging to automatically close
a new Call Record whenever you move to an existing Call Record. These features alert you to
existing Call Records for a particular customer, and, if a Call Record already exists for a
problem, you can update that record rather than create a new record.
166 HEAT
4 The Keys for Call Count Increment/Decrement section provides options for incrementing the
Call Counter in the Call Status banner. Incrementing calls is useful if several customers call
about the same problem. Instead of opening a new Call Record for each caller, you can use the
Call Counter (which appears in the Call Status banner) to record the number of calls about the
problem.
• Use +/‐ Keys ‐ Allows you to add to or subtract from the Call Counter in the Call Logging Call
Status banner by pressing the + or ‐ keyboard keys. If you use the + and ‐ keys to change the
call count, you cannot use the numeric keypad for data entry.
• Use Ctrl +/‐ Keys ‐ Allows you to add to or subtract from the Call Counter in the Call Logging
Call Status banner by pressing Ctrl and the + or ‐ keyboard keys, enabling you to use the
numeric keypad for data entry.
5 The Auto Search Interval section lets you specify how often you want your system to auto
search your knowledge base. This option is only available when Auto Search is activated from
the Solution menu. Either type a numeric value into the field or scroll to select a value.
6 In the Tracker section, specify a default call tracker for Call Records:
• Default Tracker ‐ Specifies the person responsible for the Call Record (owner): the tracker’s
ID is automatically entered into the Call Record.
• E‐Mail Name ‐ The Default Tracker email address.
• Change Password ‐ Allows you to change your system password.
7 If you want the HEAT Dashboard to display when you log on to Call Logging, select the Show
Dashboard at Startup check box.
8 Select the Tabbed layout option if you want Call Groups, SupportMail, and My Hot List
displayed as tabs.
9 Click OK.
Grid Settings
Call Logging allows you to customize the grid view. This includes setting Call History options, the
Assignment and Journal views, sort orders, and the fields displayed on the Configuration form. The
settings established on this tab are workstation‐specific and are not associated with the user.
To Set Grid Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Grid Settings tab.
User Guide 167

2 In the Call History Chronology section, select display parameters for the Call History grid view:
• Ascending ‐ Displays Call Records from oldest to newest.
• Descending ‐ Displays Call Records from newest to oldest.
• Limit Display to Calls That Are Not Closed ‐ Displays only Call Records that have an open
status.
• Limit Display to last ‐ Displays only recent Call Records as defined within the time
parameters (type the numeric value and select the interval).
3 In the Assignment section, select display parameters for the Assignments grid view. In the
Open Using sub‐section, define how information is displayed by default:
• Grid View ‐ Information is displayed as a grid.
• Form View ‐ Information is displayed as a form.
Select the Specify Order check box to define the order of the fields appearing on the Journal
tab and on the Call Map. In the drop‐down box, select a field associated with the Assignment
table, then select either:
• Ascending ‐ Displays alphabetically from A to Z.
• Descending ‐ Displays alphabetically from Z to A.
4 In the Journal section, select display parameters for the Journals grid view. In the Open Using
sub‐section, define how information is displayed by default:
• Grid View ‐ Information is displayed as a grid.
• Form View ‐ Information is displayed as a form.
Select the Specify Order check box to define the order of the fields appearing on the
Assignment tab and on the Call Map. In the drop‐down box, select a field associated with the
Journal table, then select either:
• Ascending ‐ Displays alphabetically from A to Z.
• Descending ‐ Displays alphabetically from Z to A.
168 HEAT
5 In the Common Config Grid Display Fields section, select display parameters for Configuration
data. Limiting the number of fields displayed helps horizontal fit and reduces the need for
scrolling. Display settings here do not affect the Configuration grid as it appears in Table
Maintenance.
• Click Less or More on the slide bar to add or remove fields. As you do that, the number of
fields that will appear in the Configuration grid view displays below the slide bar, and the
display area to the right of the slide bar changes, listing the fields that will appear.
6 Select Show Grid Lines to display grid lines in all Call Logging grid views.
7 Click Select Grid and Dialog Fonts to change the font specifications for grids and dialog boxes.
8 Click OK.
SupportMail Preferences
Call Logging allows you to customize email and alarm options including setting polling intervals,
notification options, and mail folder labels.
To Set SupportMail Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the SupportMail tab.
2 In the Poll Every field, specify how often your system checks for mail and alarms by typing or
selecting a numeric polling interval.
3 In the Alarm Popup section, select an alarm notification method:
• Pop up when Alarm fires ‐ Displays an alarm pop‐up window when an alarm is triggered.
• Indicate Alarm in Status Bar ‐ Displays an alarm icon in the status bar when an alarm is
triggered.
4 In the Folder Labels section, type a label for your Inbox, Outbox, and Drafts folders. Labels are
limited to 14 characters.
User Guide 169

5 In the Message Options section, select email options:
• Always Save to Outbox ‐ Automatically saves a copy of your email messages in your outbox.
• Always Attach Current Call ‐ Attaches a currently displayed Call Record to a SupportMail
message.
Note: You can override both of these options at any time from the email
message.
6 Click OK.
MAPI/Lotus Preferences
Call Logging supports external email systems using Lotus or MAPI formats. The User Preferences
feature lets you enable this option, and set security and preferences for external email.
To Set MAPI/Lotus Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the MAPI/Lotus tab.
2 To enable MAPI, in the MAPI Mail section, type the MAPI profile name.
3 In the Custom From field, you can type an email address that will be used in SupportMail as
the email sender.
4 In the Reply To field, you can type an email address that will be used in SupportMail as the
email address to which the recipient can reply.
5 Clear the Disable check box to enable MAPI functionality.
6 To display only unopened messages, select the Show only Unread Messages check box.
Note: A mail system may run faster when set to display only unread messages.
7 To enable Lotus, in the Lotus Mail section, type your Lotus Password in the appropriate fields.
Note: The user ID field automatically populates with the user ID specified in
Lotus and can only be changed in Lotus.
170 HEAT
8 In the Custom From field, you can type an email address that will be used in SupportMail as
the email sender.
9 In the Reply To field, you can type an email address that will be used in SupportMail as the
10 Clear the Disable check box to enable Lotus Mail functionality.
12 Click OK.
GroupWise Preferences
Call Logging supports external email systems using GroupWise. User Preferences lets you enable this
option, and set security and preferences for external email.
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the GroupWise tab.
2 In the Server field, type the name of the GroupWise mail server.
3 Type the User ID and Password for the GroupWise account in the appropriate fields (this is the
login required to access the GroupWise mail system).
4 Clear the Disable check box to enable GroupWise functionality in SupportMail.
6 Click OK.
User Guide 171

POP/SMTP Preferences
You can use POP/SMTP Mail systems to send and receive email messages in SupportMail. POP/SMTP
functionality must be enabled and configured in Call Logging User Preferences before it can be viewed
in the SupportMail tab.
To Set POP/SMTP Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the POP/SMTP tab.
2 In the POP (Incoming Server) section:
a) In the Server Name field, type the name of the POP mail server.
b) Select the SSL check box if utilizing the Secure Socket Layer protocol.
c) Type the User Name and Password for the POP account in the appropriate fields (this is the
login required to access the POP mail system).
3 In the SMTP (Outgoing Server) section:
a) In the Email Address (Default From) field, you can type an email address that will be used in
SupportMail as the email sender.
b) In the Reply To field, you can type an email address that will be used in SupportMail as the
c) In the Server Name field, type the name of the SMTP mail server.
d) Select the SSL check box if utilizing the Secure Socket Layer protocol.
e) Select the Use SMTP Authentication check box.
f) Type the User Name and Password for the SMTP account in the appropriate fields.
4 To enable POP/SMTP functionality, clear the Disable check box.
5 Click OK. POP/SMTP functionality is now available in SupportMail. POP/SMTP folders appear in
the SupportMail tab.
172 HEAT
Location Preferences
On the Location tab, you can establish a time zone offset, if required, and choose a default data
source.
The Time Zone Offset from Main Database setting addresses synchronization issues relating to the
time difference between the location of a user and the location of the HEAT database. With modern
networks, it is possible to make ODBC connections through a Wide‐Area Network (WAN), remote
modem dial‐up, etc. Time zone offset has the effect of normalizing all HEAT time entries relative to
the local database clock. Normalizing time allows every user connected to the database to access Call
Records in real time, and eliminates the possibility of a call being closed before the time it was
opened. In addition, call duration report calculations could be grossly distorted if the database
accepted non‐normalized time values.
Using the Default Data Source settings, you can apply a default data source to a user workstation,
speeding up the Call Logging launch by eliminating the need to select an ODBC data source every time
a session begins. As a result, the data source dialog box is not displayed at login.
To Set Location Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Location tab.
2 In the TimeZone Offset from Main Database section, select the hours and minutes by which
your current time differs from database time. The time period used for the offset value is local
workstation time relative to database time. For example, if the database resides in New York,
and the workstation connects from London, type 5 as an offset value in the Hours box (since
the time zone for London is 5 hours later). If the workstation is in California with a New York
database, type ‐3 as an offset (since the time zone for California is three hours earlier).
3 In the Default Data Source section, click Select. The HEAT Service & Support Data Source
dialog box opens.
4 Specify a data source from the drop‐down list. That data source displays in the field in the
Default Data Source section.
5 Type your user ID and password in the appropriate fields.
6 Click OK.
User Guide 173

Path Preferences
Use the Path tab to establish the paths to HEAT Plus Knowledge (HPK), First Level Support (FLS),
Crystal Decisions Crystal Reports, and Crystal Report files. These paths are used to add toolbar
buttons and menu items to HEAT Call Logging in order to automatically launch certain applications.
IMPORTANT: You must type the local path for HPK (HEAT>KBConnector.exe),
FLS (HEAT>Flswin.exe), or any other knowledge program you use, in the
Knowledge Base Executable field so the Solution menu within Call Logging can
launch the intended knowledge base application.
To Set Path Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Paths tab.
2 Click the Browse button beside the appropriate path field to locate the executable file, then
click Open to specify the directory path to the executable file. Once the paths have been set,
you can access the applications from within Call Logging.
3 Click OK.
Note: When you set up First Level Support, Call Logging prompts you for the
data source. Use the same data source that you selected for Call Logging. You
also need to add tables to the data source for FLS, so when you are asked if you
want to add tables, select Yes. This creates several new tables within the main
database to hold FLS information.
174 HEAT
Sound Preferences
You can use different sound files (.wav files) to indicate when Call Logging events occur. The settings
established on this tab are workstation‐specific and are not associated with the user.
To Set Sound Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Sounds tab.
2 Highlight an event in the Events list.
3 In the Sound section, type (or browse to) the location of the sound file you want to associate
with the event.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have made all of the associations you need.
5 Click OK.
Prompt Preferences
On the Prompts tab, autosave options allow you to apply settings to bypass certain Save dialog boxes.
If you opt to automatically save, you are not prompted to save your changes on Call Records, Journal
entries, or Assignments; any changes are automatically applied.
To Set Prompt Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Prompts tab.
User Guide 175

2 In the Auto‐save section:
• Select the Automatically save calls without asking check box to automatically save Call
Records upon exiting the record.
• Select the Automatically save journals without asking check box to automatically save new
Journal entries upon exiting the record.
• Select the Automatically save assignments without asking check box to automatically save
new Assignments upon exiting the record.
3 If you select the Skip "restore saved call groups" prompt on startup check box, the default
Restore Saved Call Groups prompt (normally displayed when the application is launched) is
disabled.
4 Select Always Open to display, at startup, the Call Record open at the time the application was
closed.
5 Select Never Open to display an empty Call Log screen upon startup.
6 Click OK.
HEATBoard Preferences
Although the system administrator defines security rights for the InfoCenter HEATBoard, you can set
preferences governing its display.
To Set HEATBoard Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the HEATBoard tab.
176 HEAT
2 In the HEATBoard Issue Sorting section, select how you want to sort HEATBoard issues:
• Posted By ‐ Sorts issues by the person posting the issue.
• Posted date/time ‐ Sorts issues by the date and time the issue was posted.
• Last modified date/time ‐ Sorts issues by the date and time the issue was last modified.
• Expiration date/time ‐ Sorts issues by the expiration date and time.
3 In the Direction section, select:
• Ascending ‐ Displays issues from oldest to newest.
• Descending ‐ Displays issues from newest to oldest.
4 In the Team Selection section, select the team(s) you want displayed on the HEATBoard. Click
Move Up or Move Down to alter the display order.
5 In the Team Consolidation section, determine how you want teams grouped:
• Show selected teams separately ‐ Places team issues under specific team title bars.
• Combine selected teams ‐ Displays all issues, regardless of team ownership, under a single
title bar.
• Combine selected teams except global ‐ Displays team issues under a single title bar, and
displays all Global issues under a Global title bar.
6 Click OK.
User Guide 177

Call Map Preferences

You can manipulate the content and appearance of the InfoCenter Call Map. The system
administrator determines which categories are available, but you can tailor the display to your needs.
To Set Call Map Preferences:
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Call Map tab.
2 To specify which categories to display, click a category in the Available list, then click Add to
move it to the Selected list. To add all available categories to the Call Map, click Add All.
Categories include:
• Call Info ‐ Displays call information such as Call Type and priority.
• Customer ‐ Displays customer information such as CustID and address.
• Assignment ‐ Displays Assignment information such as due date.
• Journal ‐ Displays the number of Journals available for the selected Call Record.
• Call Attachments ‐ Displays Call Record attachments on the Call Map.
• Global Attachments ‐ Displays Global attachments on the Call Map.
• Profile Attachments ‐ Displays Customer Record attachments on the Call Map.
3 To remove a category from display, select the category in the Selected list, then click Remove
to move it back to the Available list. To remove all categories from display, click Remove All.
4 To define the order in which categories appear in the Call Map, select a category, then click
Move Up or Move Down.
5 In the Show/Hide section, select:
• Show Call Info Field Name ‐ Under the Call Info category, displays the field name in addition
to the value for that field. If you do not select this check box, only the field value appears.
• Show Cust Info Field Name ‐ Under the Customer category, displays the field name in
addition to the value for that field. If you do not select this check box, only the field value
appears.
178 HEAT
• Show Assignment Field Name ‐ Under the Assignment category, displays the field name in
addition to the value for that field. If you do not select this check box, only the field value
appears.
• Show Journal Field Name ‐ Under the Journal category, displays the field name in addition to
the value for that field. If you do not select this check box, only the field value appears.
• Show Assignment Count ‐ Displays the number of Assignments for the Call Record
immediately after the Assignments category.
• Show Journal Count ‐ Displays the number of Journal entries for the Call Record immediately
after the Journal category.
6 Click OK.
Sales/Marketing Links
You will only see this tab if your HEAT system has been configured to work with GoldMine.
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Sales/Marketing Links tab.
2 In the GoldMine Path field, type the path to the location of the GoldMine program (.exe) or
click Browse to navigate to that location.
3 In the Customer Window Options section, select the GoldMine tabs you want to display in the
Call Logging Customer window:
• Show Pending Activities in Customer Window ‐ Displays the Sales‐Pending tab in the
Customer window, enabling you to view a list of scheduled sales activities for a particular
GoldMine customer.
• Show Activity History in Customer Window ‐ Displays the Sales‐History tab in the Customer
window, enabling you to view a list of sales activities that took place for a particular
GoldMine customer.
4 In the Data to Display section, select the GoldMine information you want to display by default.
5 To limit the view to the activities you have created, select the Show only my activities check
box.
6 To use your HEAT User ID and password to logon to GoldMine from within Call Logging, select
the GoldMine Login Information check box, then type your HEAT User ID and password in the
appropriate fields.
7 Click OK.
Sales Alerts
You will only see this tab if your HEAT system has been configured to work with GoldMine.
1 Select Edit>User Preferences, then click the Sales Alerts tab.
2 In the Call Logging section, select display options for GoldMine alerts appearing in the Call
Logging main window:
• Show in Call Map ‐Displays the GoldMine alerts in the Call Map component of the
InfoCenter.
• Pop‐up alerts ‐ Displays the GoldMine alerts as pop‐up messages.
• Hide the alert bar if there are no alerts ‐ Hides the GoldMine alert bar when no alerts are
available.
User Guide 179

3 In the Customer Window section, select display options for GoldMine alerts appearing in the
Customer window:
• Pop‐up alerts ‐ Displays the GoldMine alerts as pop‐up messages.
• Hide the alert bar if there are no alerts ‐ Hides the GoldMine alert bar when no alerts are
available.
4 In the Wait for initial query field, type a numeric value indicating how many seconds you want
HEAT to wait before displaying GoldMine alerts.
5 Click OK.
Customize/Create Toolbars
The following tasks can be performed for toolbars:
• Create, Edit, Delete Toolbars
• Modify Default Toolbars
• Move, Resize, Rename Toolbars
• Reset Default Toolbars
• Set Themes
Create, Edit, Delete Toolbars

Call Logging allows you to create custom toolbars and add buttons to the toolbar as you need them.
An individual user's toolbar is associated with the user and is available at any network workstation
the user logs onto.
To Create a Toolbar:
1 From the main Call Logging window, select Edit>Toolbar>Customize. The Customize dialog box
opens.
2 Click the Toolbars tab.
3 Click New. The New Toolbar dialog box opens.
4 In the Toolbar Name field, type a name for your toolbar.
5 Click OK. The new toolbar is listed in the Toolbars list.
6 Drag the new toolbar to the desired location to dock it.
7 In the Customize dialog box, click the Commands tab.
8 From the Categories list, select the category containing the button you want to add. The
associated buttons appear in the Commands list.
9 Drag and drop the desired buttons onto your new toolbar.
10 Click Close.
To Remove a Toolbar Button:
1 Select Edit>Toolbar>Customize. The Customize dialog box opens.
3 Drag and drop unwanted toolbar buttons off of the toolbar.
180 HEAT
Customize/Create Toolbars
4 Click Close.
To Delete a Toolbar:
Note: You can only delete toolbars you created.
opens.
2 Click the Toolbars tab.
3 Select the toolbar you want to delete, then click Delete.
4 Click OK to confirm the deletion.
5 Click Close.
Modify Default Toolbars

You can add buttons to a default toolbar.
To Modify a Default Toolbar:
opens.
3 From the Categories list, select the category containing the button you want to add. The
associated buttons appear in the Commands list.
4 Drag and drop onto the toolbar the buttons you want displayed.
5 Click Close.
You can also create/add toolbar buttons for:
• AutoTasks ‐ Refer to "Create AutoTasks Toolbar Buttons".
• Report Shortcuts ‐ Refer to "Create Toolbar Buttons for Report Shortcuts".
• Call Groups ‐ Refer to "Create Toolbar Buttons for Call Groups".
• Customer Groups ‐ Refer to "Create Toolbar Buttons for Customer Groups".
• Internet Search ‐ Refer to "Search Internet".
User Guide 181

Move, Resize, Rename Toolbars

You can move any toolbar, resize a floating toolbar, and rename the toolbars you create.
To Move, Resize, or Rename a Toolbar:
• To move a floating toolbar, click in the colored title bar and drag it to a new location
anywhere in the workspace. It can continue as a floating toolbar or can be docked at the top,
bottom, left or right side of the window.
• To move a docked toolbar, click the dotted line located at one end of the toolbar, and drag it
to a new docked location at the top, bottom, left or right side of the workspace, or you can
leave it as a floating toolbar. As you move the toolbar, an outline appears so you know where
it is.
• To resize a floating toolbar, move the cursor over the edge of the toolbar until the cursor
becomes a double arrow. Click and drag the edge to resize it.
• To rename a toolbar, select Edit>Toolbar>Customize, then click the Toolbar tab. Select the
toolbar you want to rename (you can only rename toolbars you created). In the Rename
Toolbar dialog box, type a new toolbar name. Click OK, then click Close.
Reset Default Toolbars

If you modify a default toolbar you can reset it to the original settings.
To Reset the Default Toolbar:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar, select Edit>Toolbar>Reset to Default. The Toolbar Reset
Options dialog box opens.
2 Select either:
• Temporary ‐ The default toolbar is reestablished for the remainder of the current session. If
you make changes to the toolbar during the session, they are not saved unless the toolbar is
relocated.
• Permanent ‐ The default toolbar is reestablished; any changes you make to it are saved and
reappear when you log back on.
3 Select the Remove secondary bands from toolbar ‐ Leave only the main band check box to
delete your personal toolbars.
Set Themes
Themes allow you to customize your UI (user interface) by setting colors, backgrounds, menu bar
options, etc. Several themes are available in HEAT.
Note: When you set a theme, the theme is activated for the entire HEAT suite.
To Set a Theme:
1 Select Edit>Toolbar>Customize. The Customize dialog box opens.
2 Click the Themes tab.
3 Select a theme. The preview on the right shows how the theme changes the display. Some
themes have additional settings (such as Style and Hue). Click Apply, then click Close. All
applicable modules in the HEAT suite are updated to display using the selected theme.
182 HEAT
Table Maintenance
Table Maintenance
HEAT uses a relational database that stores information in tables. The rows of the table represent records
and the columns represent fields. These tables also allow you to sort data based on any field, and
generate reports containing only certain fields from each record.
The HEAT database has several table categories. These categories each have different data dependencies
and characteristics. Tables are not limited to inclusion under only one table category; they can have
characteristics allowing them to be included in several table categories.
Three HEAT table categories relate to table maintenance in Call Logging:
• System Tables ‐ HEAT internal system tables are fundamental to the operation of HEAT; if
certain fields are deleted or altered the application does not work since the software code
needed to run the application requires their existence. These tables can, however, be edited to
contain custom, non‐system fields predicated on an individual business need. This
customization must be done through the proper application of an Edit Set by the system
administrator. System tables include the CallLog, Subset, and Asgnmnt Tables.
• Validation Tables ‐ These tables hold the values found in drop‐down lists. Your system
administrator determines which fields have validated values. The result of using validated
values is improved data entry consistency, which in turn creates more usable criteria for
creating Call Groups, searching Call Records, and developing reports. Some validation table
features:
» Helpful Validation ‐ This term refers to fields having both a drop‐down list of pre‐selected
values and the ability to allow the user to type a new value in the field. A user‐input value
is saved only in the current Call Record.
» Auto filled Fields ‐ This term refers to the fields that automatically populate based on the
validated value entered in a specific field. For example, if you press F9 and select a
Company ID from the Validate from Profile dialog box, all of the other fields (full site
address, email etc.) in the Subset auto fill.
» Tab Validating ‐ This term refers to the action of typing a partial entry, then pressing Tab to
open a Validation dialog box listing all possible values beginning with the characters typed.
For example, if a user types E in the Call Type field and presses Tab, the Validate from Call
Type dialog box opens, listing all Call Types that begin with the letter E.
• Compound Tables ‐ These tables behave as if they are separate tables, but they are not; the
database sees only one table. For example, when a user chooses a Call Type, if a Detail form is
associated with that Call Type, it displays in the Call Record. Many different Detail forms exist
for the various Call Types, and it would appear that each of these is a different table; however,
they all reside in the same Detail Table.
Table Maintenance includes:
• Adding Values
• On the Fly Table Maintenance
• Smart Prompts
• Asset Configuration
User Guide 183

Adding Values
The Table Maintenance feature allows you to further tailor the values found in Call Logging by adding
values to tables.
IMPORTANT: When you are performing table maintenance through Call
Logging, you cannot add, edit, or delete fields. With appropriate rights, you can
only add, edit, or delete values contained in those tables available for
maintenance (some system tables cannot be maintained using Table
Maintenance).
Add, Edit, and Delete Values in Table Maintenance

If your system administrator has granted you the rights to add, edit, or delete through table
maintenance, you can further customize the values in Compound, Validation, and some System
tables.
To Add a Field Value in Table Maintenance:
1 From the Call Logging main menu bar, select Accessory>Table Maintenance. The Table
Maintenance window opens.
2 In the Table drop‐down list, select the field to which you want to add a value. The current list
of values for that field displays.
3 To add a value, select Record>New or click the New Entry button on the toolbar. The window
changes to form display, including a title bar reflecting the field to which you are adding a
value, and the fields needed to add the value. Type the required information in the
appropriate fields.
Note: To switch back and forth between the form view and grid view, click the
Grid/Form View button on the toolbar, or from the menu bar select
View>Form or View>Grid. The grid view displays all the records and the form
view displays information specific to a single record.
184 HEAT
Table Maintenance
To Edit a Value:
3 Double‐click a value. The form view displays, enabling you to edit the information.
To Delete a Value:
3 Select a value.
4 Select Record>Delete or press Delete on the keyboard.
On the Fly Table Maintenance

Occasionally, you will need to add previously unavailable values as you are creating a Call Record.
You may find certain information is not available, or a new customer is calling, for whom no
information has been gathered. On the fly table maintenance enables you to generate the
value(s) you need while working on the call.
The following example illustrates how to add a new Call Type on the fly. The steps, however, are
the same regardless of the field to which you are adding a value; follow the same procedure if you
need to add a new Customer, Category, Cause, Call Status, Source, etc.
Example: Add Information On the Fly
Assume an existing customer calls and you have the Subset filled in. The customer is calling to
report what they believe is a virus infecting their system. No Virus Call Type exists, so you need to
add it.
1 Place your cursor in the Incident/Call Type field and press F9. The Validate from CallType
dialog box opens. If not all of the values for the field appear, click Show All to see a complete
list.
2 Click New. The Validation Update dialog box opens.
3 In the Call Type field, type Virus.
4 In the Description field type Suspected Virus Infection.
5 Click the Save Record button or select File>Save. The new Virus CallType appears in the
Validate from CallType dialog box.
Note: Or, you can select File>Save and Use or the Save and Use button to have
the new value populate the field.
User Guide 185

Smart Prompts
Smart Prompts are questions prompting the user to obtain more detailed information related to an
issue. The HEAT demo data contains two tables containing Smart Prompts:
• SubCallType ‐ The Smart Prompt questions stored in this table are associated with particular
CallTypes and generally display on the Detail form; if you choose the Incident/Call Type
Software, click the Detail tab and view the Software Issue drop‐down list, you find the list of
Smart Prompt questions (check boxes listed below the Software Issue drop‐down list) change
depending upon the specific software issue selected. For SubCallType Smart Prompts, you to
are allowed up to four check box questions (which the user selects if the answer is yes and
clears if the answer is no) and up to two text response questions.
• Equipment ‐ The Smart Prompt questions stored in this table are associated with the
EquipSubType. These questions display in the Configuration form when you select equipment
from the Equipment drop‐down list. If there is more than one type of that equipment selection
available, the Validate from dialog box opens, enabling you to select the specific
EquipSubType. The associated Smart Prompt questions display. For Equipment Smart Prompts,
you are allowed up to three check box questions (which the user selects if the answer is yes and
clears if the answer is no), two text response questions, and an area to type notes.
Add Smart Prompts

You can add Smart Prompts. Follow the steps below to access the smart prompt questions.
To Add a Smart Prompt:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar, select Accessory>Table Maintenance. The Table
2 From the Table drop‐down list, under Validation, select either:
• SubCallType ‐ To add questions pertaining to different CallTypes and their associated Detail
forms.
• Equipment ‐ To add questions pertaining to EquipSubType appearing in the Configuration
form.
3 Select Record>New or click the New Entry button.
• If you selected SubCallType, an empty SubCallType/Detail Issues form displays.
• If you selected Equipment, an empty Equipment/Inventory Listing form displays.
4 If you selected SubCallType, in the Call Type drop‐down list, select the CallType for which you
want to define a new SubType. In the Question fields, type the detailed questions you want
the user to ask regarding the specific SubCallType or configuration issue. Proceed to step 6.
5 If you selected Equipment, in the Config Type drop‐down list, select the Config Type. In the
Question fields, type the detailed questions you want the user to ask regarding the specific
Equipment or configuration issue.
6 Select Record>Save or click the Save Record button.
186 HEAT
Table Maintenance
Edit Smart Prompts

You can edit Smart Prompts. Follow the steps below to access and edit the smart prompt
questions.
To Edit a Smart Prompt:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar select Accessory>Table Maintenance. The Table
2 From the Table drop‐down list, under Validation, select either:
• SubCallType ‐ To edit questions pertaining to different CallTypes and their associated Detail
forms.
• Equipment ‐ To edit questions pertaining to EquipSubType appearing in the Configuration
form.
3 If you selected SubCallType, click the SubCallType header to sort the values alphabetically. If
you selected Equipment, click the Equipment header to sort the values alphabetically.
4 Double‐click the value for which you want to edit Smart Prompts. If you are editing a
SubCallType field, the SubCallType/Detail Issues form displays. If you are editing an Equipment
field, the Equipment/Inventory Listing form displays.
5 Place the insertion point in any of the Smart Prompt question fields and edit as needed.
Delete Smart Prompts

You can add, edit, or delete Smart Prompts. Follow the steps below to delete the questions.
To Delete a Smart Prompt:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar, select Accessory>Table Maintenance. The Table
2 From the Table drop‐down list, select either:
• SubCallType ‐ To delete questions pertaining to different CallTypes and their associated
Detail forms.
• Equipment ‐ To delete questions pertaining to EquipSubType appearing in the Configuration
form.
3 If you selected SubCallType, click the SubCallType header to sort the values alphabetically. If
you selected Equipment, click the Equipment header to sort the values alphabetically.
4 Double‐click the value for which you want to delete Smart Prompts. If you are deleting a
SubCallType field smart prompt, the SubCallType/Detail Issues form displays. If you are
deleting an Equipment field smart prompt, the Equipment/Inventory Listing form displays.
5 Place the insertion point in the Question field whose question you want to delete. Select the
question and press Delete.
User Guide 187

Asset Configuration
In the HEAT database, the Config table stores all asset information contained in every Configuration
Record. The Config table is a compound table so it behaves as many tables when in fact it is just one
table.
All configuration forms have four fields in common:
• HEATSeq
• CustID
• CustType
• ConfigType
Each Configuration Record has a unique, system‐generated HEATSeq value in combination with the
customer's unique CustID value. This allows each customer to have as many Configuration Records as
necessary to accommodate all of their assets.
The Asset Configuration Maintenance window (Accessory>Asset Configuration
Window>Maintenance) allows you to:
• .Add a new Configuration Record to the Customer Profile.
• Search by Customer ID or by field value to locate specific Configuration Records.
• Create a new Call Record for the selected asset.
• Transfer asset information into an existing Call Record.
At the top of the Asset Configuration Maintenance window are two tabs: the Assets and Customer
tabs. The Customer tab allows you to see which customer owns the asset selected in the Assets tab.
Note: You cannot add, edit, or delete information from the Customer Record
accessed by clicking the Customer tab.
Copy or Move Configuration Information

Call Logging provides a utility that facilitates some internal inventory control and allows you to
track asset transfers between Customer IDs. With this utility, you can copy and move
Configuration information when equipment is moved in or out for repair, when a customer
transfers parts of a system to a different department or different customer, or if more than one
department or customer shares an element. If a customer has received new equipment similar to
another customer's equipment, you can copy the Configuration information rather than manually
entering it. You must, however, manually enter a unique asset tag in the Configuration form for
the copied asset.
To Copy or Move Configuration Information:
1 With the Call Record open, select Accessory>Asset Configuration Window>Maintenance. The
Asset Configuration Maintenance window opens in form or grid view (you can switch views by
clicking the Grid/Form View button). Configuration information for the open Call Record is
displayed.
2 Select View>Transfer Mode. This splits the window into a From/To environment.
3 In the Transfer Assets From section, select the customer providing the asset:
• Select a Customer Type in the drop‐down list.
• Based on the selected Customer Type, browse to find the Customer ID. That Customer
Configuration is displayed in grid view.
188 HEAT
Table Maintenance
4 In the Transfer Assets To section, select the customer receiving the asset:
• Select a Customer Type in the drop‐down list.
• Based on the selected Customer Type, browse to find the Customer ID. That Customer
Configuration is displayed in grid view.
5 Highlight the asset to be copied or transferred to the other Customer Record. Click Move or
Copy to transfer.
6 When you have completed the transfer, select File> Close.
Note: Although the two sections are labeled from and to, you can use the up
and down Move/Copy buttons to move or copy in either direction. You can also
use the buttons in lieu of an Undo function, to reverse a transfer.
Create Call Records for Assets

From the Asset Configuration Maintenance window, you can generate a new Call Record that will
have asset information automatically pulled into the Detail form and certain fields already
populated on the Call Log form.
To Create a Call Record for an Asset:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar, select Accessory>Asset Configuration Window>
Maintenance. The Asset Configuration Maintenance window opens.
2 If the correct Customer Type is displaying its Configuration Records, select the asset in
question and continue to step 7. If the wrong Customer Type is displaying assets, in the Search
By section, select Field, and then select CustType in the adjacent drop‐down list.
3 Click Search and all of the Configuration Records for the chosen Customer Type appear.
4 Select the asset for which you want to create a Call Record.
5 Select Record>Create Call for Asset or click the Create Call for Asset button.
6 A Call Record is created for the asset you chose. It automatically displays with the Detail form
open. A message will display if the asset you select does not have a Detail form associated with
it.
Transfer Assets into Call Records

From the Asset Configuration Maintenance window, you can transfer asset information into an
existing Call Record. For example, if a customer calls and you already have a Call Record open for
them (that is, you have populated the Subset), you can transfer asset information directly into
that record.
To Transfer an Asset into a Call Record
1 Select File>New Call Record or click the New Call Record button. A new Call Record displays.
2 Press F9 to validate the Subset.
3 Select Accessory>Asset Configuration Window>Maintenance. The Asset Configuration
4 Select the asset you want to transfer into the Call Record.
5 Select Record>Transfer Asset Info.
User Guide 189

Note: If you attempt to overwrite existing asset information with new asset
information of a different variety, a dialog box opens, explaining the Call Record
Detail form does not have fields matching your chosen asset fields. This dialog
box provides an alternate Detail form option.
6 The Call Log form reflects the Call Type associated with the asset you chose, and the Detail
form reflects the fields associated with the asset.
Transfer or Delete Assets

The Transfer Assets function allows you to manage asset ownership through:
• Moving an asset to another customer.
• Copying an asset to another customer.
• Deleting an asset.
Using the transfer assets function allows you to manipulate assets while minimizing the
possibility of misspellings and transposed numbers. You can also produce duplicates of assets and
transfer them to many customers rather than creating the assets each time you need them.
To Transfer or Delete an Asset:
1 From the main Call Logging menu bar select Accessory>Asset Configuration Window>Transfer
Assets. The Asset Configuration Maintenance window opens in Transfer mode.
2 In the Transfer Assets From section, select the Customer Type.
3 Click Browse. The Validate from Profile dialog box opens. Make your selection from the list,
then click OK. Assets for the selection appear in the Transfer Assets From pane.
4 In the Transfer Assets To section, select the Customer Type.
5 Click Browse. The Validate from Profile dialog box opens. Make your selection, then click OK.
Assets for the selection appear in the Transfer Assets To pane.
6 The following buttons allow you to move, copy, or delete assets:
• Move (up arrow) ‐ Moves the selected asset from the lower pane to the upper pane. Notice
the ownership of the asset changes when it is moved.
• Move (down arrow) ‐ Moves the selected asset from the upper pane to the lower pane.
Notice the ownership of the asset changes when it is moved.
• Delete (up arrow) ‐ Deletes the asset selected in the upper pane. Click Yes to confirm the
deletion.
• Delete (down arrow) ‐ Deletes the asset selected in the lower pane. Click Yes to confirm the
deletion.
• Copy (up arrow) ‐ Copies the selected asset from the lower pane into the upper pane. Notice
the ownership of the asset changes when it is copied.
• Copy (down arrow) ‐ Copies the selected asset from the upper pane into the lower pane.
Notice the ownership of the asset changes when it is copied.
To copy or move an asset, click the asset to be copied or transferred to the other Customer
Record. Click Move or Copy to transfer.
To delete an asset, click the asset to be deleted, then click the appropriate Delete button.
7 Select File>Close.
190 HEAT
13
Reporting
Using HEAT's Reporting feature, you can find answers to almost any operational question or generate
detailed business metrics. In Call Logging, you can report on information in a couple ways:
• You can create, copy, edit, delete, and run Report Shortcuts. You can also add, rename, delete
report folders, and you can create toolbar buttons for Report Shortcuts. Refer to "Working with
Report Shortcuts" for details.
• You can run an external report (.rpt)
Note: You an also use Answer Wizard to run reports.
Report Shortcuts
A Report Shortcut is associated with a report on your server or computer. The Report Shortcut
launches the report using the Report Shortcut properties you define. These properties control
how Report Shortcuts are displayed in the Report Manager and how they operate in your system.
• Default Shortcuts ‐ You can designate default shortcuts to run on all Call Records or all Call
Records a specific Call Type. This enables you to run the default report quickly using the Run
Call Ticket Report menu item on the Report menu.
• Views ‐ You can designate an audience for a shortcut by selecting a View for the shortcut.
• Shortcut Folders ‐ You can organize shortcuts by folder. HEAT provides a default folder called
Report Shortcuts, or you can create your own.
• Toolbar Buttons ‐ You can create a toolbar button for each report shortcut for easy access.
External Reports
You can run any report (.rpt) on‐the‐fly by browsing to it. You can view it on your monitor, print it,
or save it to a file.
For your convenience, HEAT is shipped with several predefined reports and Report Shortcuts,
designed to help you automate your daily duties. You can use these reports, edit them, delete
them, or create your own with a tool such as Crystal Reports.
Reporting
Working with Report Shortcuts

The following tasks can be performed for Report Shortcuts:
• Add Report Shortcuts
• Run Report Shortcuts
• Copy Report Shortcuts
• Edit Report Shortcuts
• Delete Report Shortcuts
• Set Default Report Shortcuts
• Add, Rename, Delete Report Shortcut Folders
• Create Toolbar Buttons for Report Shortcuts
Note: Reports can be printed after you run the report.
Add Report Shortcuts

You can create a Report Shortcut using the Manage Reports dialog box.
To Add a Report Shortcut:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select Report>Manage Reports. The Manage Reports dialog
box opens.
2 Click Add. The Add Report Shortcut dialog box opens.
192 HEAT
3 On the Required tab, click Browse (at the bottom of the dialog box) to navigate to the report
(.rpt) for which you want to create a shortcut. The name of the selected report appears in the
Name field. You can change the name if needed (a maximum of 30 characters is available).
4 To display the shortcut on the Report menu for quick access, select Display on menu. If you do
not select this option, you must run the shortcut from the Manage Reports dialog box.
5 In the Save to View section, select the audience who will have access to the shortcut. If you
6 To organize the shortcut by folder, select an existing folder in the Folder drop‐down list.
Note: If the folder does not yet exist, exit the process and create the folder.
7 Click the Print tab to set print options:
• Prompt at run‐time ‐ Prompts you when the report is run to preview, print, or export the
report.
• Preview in window ‐ Displays the report in the Report window only (no print options).
User Guide 193

Reporting
• Send to printer ‐ Sends the report to the printer without prompting for print options. If you
select this option the Printer section becomes active. Select Use default printer specified in
report if you want to default to that printer, or click Setup to open a Print Setup dialog box,
in which you can specify a printer (you can also change paper and print settings). Click Clear
to clear the printer path field settings.
• Export to file, application, etc. ‐ Displays dialog boxes at run‐time, defining export
parameters. After these parameters are defined, the report exports to the designated
destination.
8 Click the Selection Formula tab to set selection criteria:
• Prompt at run‐time ‐ Prompts you when the report is run with the next three options: Do
not change, Limit to current call ticket at run‐time, Limit to current call group at run‐time.
• Do not change ‐ Applies the formula as it was written (refer to "Running Crystal Reports" for
more information about the Selection Formula).
• Limit to current call ticket at run‐time ‐ Runs the report against the currently active Call
Record only.
• Limit to current call group at run‐time ‐ Runs the report against the currently active Call
Group.
9 Click the Report Parameters tab, then choose the parameter values you want to preset for
run‐time. You can also establish a variety of values for a parameter, from which the user can
select when the report is run.
194 HEAT
a) To preset or provide default parameters, select a parameter in the Report Parameters
section:
• Name ‐ Identifies the specific parameter by name.
• Type ‐ Identifies the specific type of parameter: string, number, currency, Boolean, or
date.
• Values ‐ Two types of values exist: single and multiple, which depend on how the report
was designed in Crystal Reports. If the value is single, you can type only one value.
• Kind ‐ Two kinds exist: discrete or range. A discrete value is singular, and a range covers
values between a beginning and an ending value.
b) In the Values for Parameter, you can select either:
• Preset parameter values ‐ Designates a value to always be used when the report is run.
If you designate such a value, Call Logging does not prompt you at run‐time to choose a
value.
• Provide default parameter values ‐ Designates a variety of options for the user to
choose from at run‐time. These are values that do not already appear in the list of
available values and are added to that list. For example, if you have Priority 1, Priority 2,
and Priority 3 already available, you can add Priority 4 and 5, which will also appear in
the list of available values at run‐time.
c) For either of the options selected in step 9b, click Add.
• For Preset parameter values, the Add Discrete Value dialog box opens. Use this dialog
box to add just one report parameter value (for example, Call Status = Open). In the
Available field, either type a default value in the field, select a value in the drop‐down
list, or click Insert to add values from a HEAT field.
Note: Crystal Reports allow multiple discrete values. For example, you can add
Call Status = Open and Call Status = Pending.
• For Provide default parameter values, the Add Default Values dialog box opens. In the
Available field, either type a default value in the field, select a value in the drop‐down
list, or click Insert to add values from a HEAT field. Then click Add to add the defined
value to the list of default values, listed under Selected. You will be prompted to choose
from the added default values at run time. To remove a value from the list, select a
default value in the Selected box, then click Remove.
User Guide 195

Reporting
10 Click the Data Source tab, then choose the data source against which to run your report:
• Prompt at run‐time ‐ Prompts you with the following three options at run‐time.
• Do not change ‐ Runs the report against the currently selected data source (as displayed in
the Original Source section).
• Use Call Logging data source at run‐time ‐ Runs the report against the data source Call
Logging is using at run‐time.
• Change data source ‐ Enables you to select a data source: select the data source listed in the
Original Source section, then click Change. The Report Data Source dialog box opens. Select
the new data source, then click OK. The data source appears in the New Source section. Click
Reset to revert to the Original Source.
IMPORTANT: FrontRange Solutions recommends setting up the reports to use
the Call Logging data source at run‐time. If you attempt to run reports against a
database unlike the one for which they are designed, you may receive errors.
11 Click OK. The shortcut is listed in the Manage Reports dialog box.
12 Click Close.
Run Report Shortcuts

You can run a report shortcut using the Manage Reports dialog box. You can also run a shortcut by
clicking its toolbar button (if defined), or by selecting it from the Report menu (if defined). The
following procedure describes how to run the report shortcut from the Manage Reports dialog box.
To Run a Report Shortcut:
box opens.
2 In the View section, select the View containing the shortcut you want to run. If you click Team,
select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list.
3 In the list of shortcuts (filtered by View), select the shortcut you want to run.
4 Click Run. If report parameters are required to run the report, you will be prompted to provide
them.
196 HEAT
Copy Report Shortcuts

You can copy a report shortcut to create another shortcut.
Note: This copies the shortcut and not the actual report
To Copy a Report Shortcut:
box opens.
2 In the View section, select the View containing the shortcut you want to copy. If you click
Team, select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list.
3 In the list of shortcuts (filtered by View), select the shortcut you want to copy.
4 Click Copy. The Copy Report Shortcut dialog box opens.
5 Change the name of the report.
6 Make any needed changes to the settings on the various tabs.
7 Click OK.
Edit Report Shortcuts

You can edit a Report Shortcut using the Manage Reports dialog box.
To Edit a Report Shortcut:
box opens.
2 In the View section, select the View containing the shortcut you want to edit. If you click
3 In the list of shortcuts (filtered by View), select the shortcut you want to edit.
4 Click Edit. The Edit Report Shortcut dialog box opens.
5 Make your changes.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Close.
Delete Report Shortcuts

You can delete a report shortcut using the Manage Reports dialog box.
To Delete a Report Shortcut:
box opens.
2 In the View section, select the View containing the shortcut you want to delete. If you click
3 In the list of shortcuts (filtered by View), select the shortcut you want to delete.
4 Click Delete.
5 Click Yes to confirm the deletion. The report is removed from the system.
User Guide 197

Reporting
6 Click Close.
Set Default Report Shortcuts

You can designate a Report Shortcut as the default shortcut to run for all Call Records or for all Call
Records of a specific CallType. The default shortcut runs every time you select Report>Run Call Ticket
Report.
Note: Defaults for a specific Call Type override defaults for all Call Records.
To Set a Default Shortcut Report
1 Select Report>Manage Reports from the Call Logging menu. The Manage Reports dialog box
opens.
2 In the View section, select the View containing the shortcut you want to designate as the
default. If you click Team, select the appropriate team from the drop‐down list.
3 In the list of shortcuts (filtered by View), select the shortcut you want to designate as the
default.
4 In the Manage Reports dialog box menu bar select:
• Default>Set as Default for All Call Tickets ‐ Designates the shortcut as the default to run for
all Call Records. The shortcut will be run against all Call Records when you select Report>Run
Call Ticket Report.
• Default>Set as Default for Current Call Type ‐ Designates the shortcut as the default to run
for all Call Records of a specific CallType. Call Logging automatically selects the currently
active Call Record CallType.
5 To designate defaults for other Call Types, select Default>Edit Defaults, then select a Call Type
and click the Shortcuts button to designate a shortcut. Click Select, then click OK.
6 Click Close.
To Delete Report Shortcut Defaults:
1 In the Manage Reports dialog box menu bar, select Default>Edit Defaults. The Default
Shortcuts dialog box opens.
2 To delete a report shortcut default, click a default, then click Clear.
3 Calcite Yes to confirm the deletion.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close.
Add, Rename, Delete Report Shortcut Folders

You can add new folders to the Report Shortcut list, rename them, or delete them.
To Add, Rename, or Delete a Report Shortcut Folder:
1 Select Report>Manage Reports from the Call Logging menu. The Manage Reports dialog box
opens.
2 To add a new report shortcut folder, click New Folder. The New Folder dialog box opens.
3 Type a name for the new folder and click OK.
198 HEAT
Running Crystal Reports
4 The new folder is listed in the Report Shortcuts tree in alphabetical order.
5 To rename a folder, select the folder, then click Edit. The folder can be renamed within the
Report Shortcut list.
6 To delete a folder, select the folder, then click Delete. If there are no reports in the folder, it is
deleted from the list. If there are reports associated with the folder, a dialog box opens,
providing options:
• Move items to a different folder ‐ Moves the items to a different folder in the Report
Shortcut tree, then deletes the folder.
• Move items out of folder ‐ Moves the items out of the folder and into the generic Report
Shortcut tree, then deletes the folder.
• Delete folder items ‐ Deletes the folder and all of its contents.
Make your selection, then click OK.
7 Click Close.
Create Toolbar Buttons for Report Shortcuts

You can create a toolbar button for a Report Shortcut so that you can run it directly from the Call
Logging toolbar.
To Create a Toolbar Button for a Report Shortcut:
1 Create a Report Shortcut.
2 In the Manage Reports dialog box, in the list of shortcuts (filtered by View), select the shortcut
for which you want to create a toolbar button.
custom image. Images are limited to 45 KB. The user must possess the
appropriate security right (Custom Image Import) to add and remove custom
images.
6 Click OK. The button is automatically placed on the Call Logging toolbar.
Running Crystal Reports

You can run any Crystal Report (.rpt) on‐the‐fly by accessing the Run Crystal Reports option. Generally,
these are reports you run infrequently and for which you have established no shortcut.
Note: If you do have a shortcut for the Crystal report, and you defined
parameter options for it when you created the shortcut, those parameters will
not be available if you access the report in the manner described below. The
report runs exactly as it was originally set up by the Crystal Report designer.
User Guide 199

Reporting
To Run a Crystal Report:
1 From the Call Logging menu bar, select Report>Run Crystal Report. The Run Crystal Report
dialog box opens.
2 In the Report Filename field, type the path to the report, or click Browse to navigate to the
report location.
3 In the Print section, select:
• Preview in window ‐ Provides a view of the report on your monitor.
• Send to printer ‐ Prints the report.
• Export to file, application, etc. ‐ Generates the report in another application, such as
Microsoft Excel. If you select this option, an Export dialog box opens (after you click OK),
enabling you to select a format and a destination for the saved report.
4 In the Selection Formula section, you can specify against which Call Record or Call Group you
want the report to run:
• Do not change ‐ Runs against all Call Records.
• Limit to current call ticket ‐ Runs against the current Call Record only.
• Limit to current call group ‐ Runs against the current Call Group only.
5 In the Data Source section, specify the data source against which to run your report:
• Do not change ‐ Runs the report against the data source for which it was designed.
• Use Call Logging data source at run‐time ‐ Runs the report against the data source Call
Logging is using at run‐time.
6 Click OK to run the report. If report parameters are required to run the report, you will be
prompted to provide them.
200 HEAT
14
SupportMail
SupportMail is HEAT's internal email. Through SupportMail, not only can you send email to any other
individual using Call Logging, but you can send mail externally to any recipient using GroupWise, Lotus,
MAPI, or POP/SMTP‐compliant email protocols.
When emailing another Call Logging user, you can attach Call Records but you cannot attach files. The Call
Record can be accessed within the message, and displays in the main Call Logging window. If emailing to
an external email address, you cannot attach Call Records but you can attach files. An address book is
available, containing all of the HEAT users recorded in the Tracker table and the external recipients held in
the external email protocol address book. When the address book is opened, it defaults to the HEAT
address entries.
You can also send broadcast messages to all logged‐on HEAT users, alerting them to important business
issues. You can attach a Call Record to your Broadcast. In SupportMail, you can establish Groups in the
SupportMail address book. To ensure email is read in a timely fashion, SupportMail allows you to forward
unread email when a predefined period of time has elapsed.
For SupportMail procedures, refer to:
• Setting Up SupportMail
• Navigating SupportMail
• Creating SupportMail Groups
• Creating New Folders in SupportMail
• Sending an E‐mail through SupportMail
• Broadcast Messages
SupportMail
Setting Up SupportMail
All HEAT users are automatically set up for SupportMail. When users are added to the Tracker table, their
logon ID is added as a SupportMail addressee. The settings established for SupportMail through User
Preferences are logon‐specific and are associated with the user. To establish these default settings, refer
to "SupportMail Preferences".
SupportMail is designed to communicate directly with compliant email systems through their respective
applications: MAPI, GroupWise, Lotus, and POP/SMTP are the email systems/protocols supported by
HEAT. You can log on to the email application directly through Call Logging. Configure external email
protocols in User Preferences, enabling HEAT to directly access the email client's address book.
Note: If you are using a POP/SMTP email protocol, no directly accessible
address book functionality is available.
Navigating SupportMail
To launch SupportMail, from the main Call Logging menu bar select View>SupportMail or click the
SupportMail button in the Status Bar in the lower right corner of the Call Logging window. The
SupportMail tab opens.
The SupportMail tab is divided into two panes:
• Folders ‐ The list of folders storing email. You can add additional folders to organize incoming
mail by sender or subject.
• Contents ‐ When you select a folder in the Folders list, the Contents section displays the list of
the email messages contained in that folder. Double‐click an email to view it. Three different
symbols appear next to an email, indicating the status of the message:
Indicates the message is unread.
Indicates the message has been read.
Indicates a Call Record is attached to the message.
SupportMail Toolbar
The SupportMail tab has its own toolbar:
• New Message ‐ Opens the Compose Message dialog box.
• New Folder ‐ Opens the New Folder dialog box, in which you can name a new folder for
organizing your mail.
• View Broadcasts ‐ Opens the Broadcasts dialog box, in which you can create a broadcast
message.
• View Groups ‐ Opens the Groups dialog box, in which you can view and open the various
group subsets of Call Logging users (you can also create a new group).
• Reply ‐ This button becomes available when you select an email from the Contents pane.
Opens the Compose Message dialog box, in which you can write a response.
• Forward ‐ This button becomes available when you select an email from the Contents pane.
Opens the Compose Message dialog box. The original email appears in the Notes section.
202 HEAT
Creating SupportMail Groups
• Move To ‐ Opens the Move To dialog box, in which you can move the selected email to
another folder.
• Copy ‐ Opens the Copy To dialog box, in which you can copy the selected email to another
folder.
• Delete ‐ Deletes the selected email. If you select an internal email, it is marked for deletion.
If you select an external email for deletion, SupportMail deletes that email from the email
client. The deletions do not occur until the mailbox refreshes.
• Go To Call ‐ If there is a Call Record attached to an email, click this button and the Call Record
displays.
• Refresh ‐ Refreshes the mailbox by polling between polling intervals.
• Create Journal ‐ Opens a dialog box asking you to confirm the creation of an email journal for
the designated Call Record. If you click Yes, the email message is transferred into a new
Journal entry in the Call Record.
Creating SupportMail Groups

You can arrange HEAT users into useful subsets, then send SupportMail to these defined groups.
To Create a Group:
1 In the main Call Logging window, select View>SupportMail. The SupportMail tab opens.
2 Click the View Groups button. The Groups dialog box opens.
3 Click New. The Group dialog box opens.
4 In the Name field, type a name for your new group. You can use any combination of 8
alphanumeric characters.
5 In the Description field, type a description of the group.
6 Click the Address Book button to add users to the group.
7 Select Global if you want to make the new group universally available.
8 Click OK, then click Exit.
Creating New Folders in SupportMail

You can create as many folders in SupportMail as necessary to organize your email messages. For
example, you might choose to organize by priority, date, sender, subject, issue type, etc.
To Create a New Folder:
1 In the main Call Logging window, select View>SupportMail. The SupportMail tab opens.
2 Click the New Folder button. The New Folder dialog box opens.
3 In the Name field, type a name for the new folder.
4 Click OK.
User Guide 203

SupportMail
Sending an E-mail through SupportMail

You can send email to either internal HEAT users or external addressees.
To Send an E‐mail through SupportMail:
1 With SupportMail open, select File>New Message from the Call Logging menu bar, or click the
New Message button. The Compose Message dialog box opens.
2 The From field at the top automatically defaults to your user ID. Click the Fields button to
display a list of available address fields, including CC, BCC, and Forward, which can be selected
or deselected as needed.
Note: If you are sending an mail externally to a recipient using GroupWise,
Lotus, MAPI, or POP/SMTP‐compliant email protocols, and you have specified a
custom From and Reply To email address on the appropriate tab in User
Preferences, then those email addresses will be displayed. Refer to "Set User
Preferences" for details.
3 If you know the address of the recipient, you can type it in the To field; otherwise click
Address.
Note: If you type (rather than select) an external address in the field, you must
preface it with the email application or protocol being used, such as MAPI:, etc.
4 The Address Book dialog box opens to the HEAT address book. If you need to access external
mail, click the drop‐down arrow and select an alternate Mail System.
5 Select the addressee, then click OK.
6 If you need add a CC, or BCC, click the Address button to select the recipient.
Note: If you do not see these fields, click the Fields button at the top to select
and display the desired fields.
7 In the Subject field, type the message subject.
8 Select the Message Format: either HTML or Plain Text.
If you select HTML, you have access to the following message formatting options in the
formatting toolbar:
• Modify font, font size, font style, font color
• Add highlight color.
• Align left, center, right, or justify.
• Add numbering or bullets.
• Decrease or increase indent.
• Add a hyperlink:
» Click the Hyperlink button to open the Hyperlink dialog box.
» Select the type of link.
» Type the URL.
» Click OK.
204 HEAT
Broadcast Messages
• Add a picture to the message (click the Image button). If you add a picture, you can
specify Alternate Text (which appears when pictures are loading or are missing),
alignment, spacing around the picture, and add a border (specify point size).
Note: If you change the email format from HTML to Plain Text after typing the
email message, you will see a warning indicating that changing the email
format will remove all formatting, including any pictures. Click OK to proceed;
click Cancel to cancel the format change and maintain the formatting.
9 In the message field, type the email message.
10 If the email is external, you can attach files. Click the Attach button to locate and attach one or
more files to the email (press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting multiple files). The attached
file names appear in the field adjacent to the Attach button. Move your cursor over the file
name link to see the file path. Right‐click the file name link and select Delete to remove the
attachment.
11 If you want to automatically forward the email (if it remains unread for a specific period of
time by any or all recipients), type the email address in the Forward If Not Read field or click
Forward. The Forward If Not Read dialog box opens, in which you can select a forwarding
recipient and a date/time deadline after which the message will be forwarded. Click OK.
Note: If you do not see the Forward If Not Read field, click the Fields button at
the top and select Forward.
12 If the email is internal, you can attach a Call Record. Select the Attach Call check box (which
specifies the Call Record number of the currently active call).
13 Select Save to Outbox if you want a copy of the email saved to your Outbox.
14 The Read Receipt option is only available if you are emailing to an external addressee. Select
this option if you want a return email when the recipient reads your message. If you enable it,
your return email goes to the external protocol folder in the SupportMail Folder list.
15 Select Create Journal if you want to import the email to a Journal entry for the currently active
Call Record. If there are files attached to the email, you are asked if you want to attach the files
to the Call Record.
16 Click Send.
Broadcast Messages
You can alert everyone logged onto Call Logging of an important business issue or event using a broadcast
message. You can attach a Call Record to your broadcast message if needed. Broadcast messages always
pop up on users' monitors. They are not tied to a polling frequency, and are therefore immediately
displayed.
The HEAT system administrator determines if you have rights to send broadcast messages. If you do not
have this ability, another way to send messages to large groups of people is through the HEATBoard (refer
to "HEATBoard"). Broadcast messages are generally reserved for only the most urgent, globally‐
applicable notifications.
To Send a Broadcast Message:
1 With SupportMail open, click the View Broadcasts button. The Broadcasts dialog box opens.
2 Click New. The Create Broadcast dialog box opens.
User Guide 205

SupportMail
3 In the Expiration section, specify a date and time for the message to expire. Users who log on
after the designated expiration date/time do not get the broadcast message.
4 Type a the broadcast subject in the Subject field.
5 Type the message in the Note section.
6 Select Attach Current Call if you want the currently active Call Record to be attached to the
broadcast message.
7 Select Save Broadcast to Outbox if you want a copy of the message saved in your Outbox.
8 Select Disable if you do not want the message to automatically delete upon expiration.
9 Click Send.
Editing Broadcast Messages

You can edit a previously sent broadcast message. Recipients who read the original message do
not receive the edited message; only recipients who have not received the original message
receive the edited message.
To Edit a Broadcast Message:
1 Click the View Broadcasts button. The Broadcasts dialog box opens.
2 Select the broadcast message you want to edit.
3 Click Edit. Make the necessary changes.
4 Click Send.
206 HEAT
15
Printing
Call Logging allows you to print both Call Records (form view or grid view) and entire Call Groups. You can:
• Use Print Preview
• Print Call Records in Form View
• Print Call Records in Grid View
• Print by Call Group
Printing
Print Preview
Use Print Preview to review the currently active Call Record before you print it.
To Preview a Call Record:
1 While in the Call Record you want to print, select File>Print>Preview. The preview window
opens.
2 Use the preview window buttons to view the Call Record.
• Print ‐ Prints the Call Record
• Next Page ‐ Pages down to the next page.
• Previous Page ‐ Pages up to the previous page.
• Toggle One/Two pages ‐ Displays two pages at a time or goes back to a one‐page display.
• Zoom In ‐ Magnifies the preview image.
• Zoom Out ‐ Reduces the preview image.
3 Click the Close button to exit the preview window or click the Print button to print the Call
Record.
Print Call Records in Form View

You can print the currently active Call Record. A Call Record must be saved before it can be printed.
To Print a Call Record:
1 In the main Call Logging window, select File>Print>Call Ticket. The Print Call Ticket dialog box
opens.
2 Select print quality from the Print Quality drop‐down list.
3 In the Copies field, select the number of copies to print.
4 Select Collate Copies to collate multiple pages (if available).
5 Click Setup to change the printer settings. The typical Windows Print Setup dialog box opens.
You can:
• Select a printer.
• Set its properties.
• Select the paper size.
• Select Source in the Size and Source area.
• Select either Portrait or Landscape in the Orientation area.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Sections to Print section of the Print Call Ticket dialog box, select all options that apply.
8 In the Section Spacing section, select the spacing scale for the Call Ticket print out.
9 In the Header Info section, select all options that apply.
10 Click OK.
208 HEAT
Print Call Records in Grid View
Print Call Records in Grid View

You can print a grid view of certain Call Record elements. Call Logging provides a Grid Page Setup feature
to set the headers, footers, and fonts applicable to the document you are printing.
Note: A Call Record must be saved before it can be printed.
The following provide grid views:
• Detail, Assignment, or Journal forms in the Call Record
• Records in Table Maintenance
• Call History
• Call Record Browse
To Print in Grid View:
1 While in grid view, select File>Grid Page Setup. The Grid Page Setup dialog box opens.
2 In the Enter the header text field, type header information.
3 In the Enter the footer text field, type the footer information.
4 In the Font and Margins sections, select the settings for how the grid is to print on the page (a
sample of the font appears in the Sample section).
5 Click OK. The dialog box closes.
6 Select File>Print>Grid.
7 Click OK.
Export Call Records

You can export Call Records from the Call Record Browse dialog box, which displays a grid of Call Records
in the currently displayed Group.
1 While in the Call Group, open the Call Record Browse dialog box by pressing Ctrl+B (or select
Group>Call Record Browse).
2 In the Call Record Browse dialog box, click Export. The Save As dialog box opens.
3 In the Save as type field, select the type of file. You can save the Call Records as an Excel
spreadsheet (.xls), as an XML file, or as a .txt file.
4 Click Save.
5 When the export is complete, the HEATExport dialog box displays an Export Successful
message. Click OK.
Print by Call Group

You can print each Call Record within the current Call Group.
Note: A Call Record must be saved before it can be printed.
To Print Call Records by Call Group:
1 While in the Call Group you want to print, select File>Print>Group. The Print Group ‐ Work
Group dialog box opens.
User Guide 209

Printing
2 Select a print quality from the Print Quality drop‐down list.
3 In the Copies field, select the number of copies to print.
4 Select Collate Copies to collate multiple pages (if available).
5 Click Setup to change the printer settings. The typical Windows Print Setup dialog box opens.
You can:
• Select a printer.
• Set its properties.
• Select the paper size.
• Select Source in the Size and Source area.
• Select either Portrait or Landscape in the Orientation area.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Sections to Print section of the Print Call Ticket dialog box, select all options that apply.
8 In the Section Spacing section, select the spacing scale for the Call Ticket print out.
9 In the Header Info section, select all options that apply.
10 Click OK.
210 HEAT
16
MobileHEAT
MobileHEAT is a utility allowing a user to access Call Logging functionality off‐line. Individuals can work
off‐line, then synchronize with the main HEAT database (the host) at a later time. MobileHEAT is part of
Call Logging and is accessed through the Accessory option on the main menu bar. The HEAT system
administrator must grant the off‐line user MobileHEAT security rights. If the user does not have these
rights, the MobileHEAT options in Call Logging are not available. Since the MobileHEAT database functions
independently of the main HEAT database, many mobile users can operate as satellites on a single HEAT
installation.
Using this host/mobile arrangement, a mobile user is able to copy a group of calls from the host, work on
them, then transfer the updated records back to the host. The mobile user can also create new Call
Records and transfer those back to the host for integration in the main HEAT database.
The structure of this database is virtually identical to the host database: all of the required table structure
is copied over to the mobile system, including Profile records, Configuration Records, and Validation table
values. The data specific to individual Call Records is not copied over until specifically requested. Call
Records added to the mobile database are given a temporary Call ID number starting with 9 (for example,
90000035). When Call Records are transferred from the mobile database to the host, new Call Records get
a permanent Call ID in sequence with the host Call Records. If a Call Record is changed in both the host
database and the mobile database, the most recent version of the Call Record takes effect in the host
database.
Using MobileHEAT You Can:
• Update Call Records copied from the HEAT system. If the same record was changed on the host
system the record with the most recent changes takes effect.
• Create new Call Records, which receive a temporary Call ID beginning with the number 9. When
transferred back to the host the Call Records receive a permanent Call ID in sequence with
resident Call Records.
• Use knowledge bases if they are installed on your mobile system. When you transfer the
database information over to the mobile system, the resident knowledge base does not
automatically transfer with it. You have to install and update the knowledge base tools
separately.
Using MobileHEAT You Cannot:
• Add or change Profile or Configurations (those functions are disabled in Call Logging in the
mobile system).
• Add or update Validation entries.
MobileHEAT
• Delete Call Records from the host database. You can delete Call Records from your mobile
database, but these deletions are not applied to the host.
• Access files and applications stored in the host system. Attachments added in the mobile
database do not synchronize to the host system.
• Change your password.
• Use SupportMail.
• Set or view alarms.
For MobileHEAT procedures, refer to:
• Set Up the MobileHEAT Database
• Synchronizing Call Records
212 HEAT
Set Up the MobileHEAT Database

The process of creating a new data source and its associated database can take up to several hours to
complete, depending on the size of your host database. For the MobileHEAT database, you can use
Microsoft SQL Server or Microsoft SQL Server Express.
If a MobileHEAT data source already resides on the workstation on which you are trying to copy a new
one, the system displays an overwrite warning dialog box.
IMPORTANT: Before setting up the database, create an empty database in SQL
(sometimes referred to as a database shell) with database credentials that
include rights to create tables. Then continue to the procedure below.
To Create the MobileHEAT Data Source and Database:
1 From the main Call Logging menu, select Accessory>Set Up MobileHEAT Database. The
MobileHEAT Setup dialog box opens.
Note: The following steps reflect the use of Microsoft SQL Server, rather than
Express.
2 Click Select to create the data source. The Microsoft SQL Server DSN Configuration dialog box
opens.
3 Accept the default name (MobileHEATSQL), type a description (optional), then select the
server where the database shell is located. Click Next.
User Guide 213

MobileHEAT
4 In the next dialog box, select how you want the SQL server to verify the login ID authenticity:
• Select the With Integrated Windows authentication option if you want to use Windows
logon credentials to access the database.
• Select the With SQL Server Authentication using a login ID and password entered by the
user option if you want to specify the SQL Server database logon credentials. Then type the
logon credentials for the SQL Server database in the Login ID and Password fields.
5 Click Next.
6 In the following dialog box, change the default database to the name of the database shell,
and select the ANSI options. Click Next.
214 HEAT
7 In the final dialog box, deselect all options, then click Finish. The ODBC Microsoft SQL Server
Setup dialog box opens, displaying the configuration for the new data source. You can click the
Test Data Source button to test connectivity to your data source.
8 Click OK. This returns you to the MobileHEAT Setup dialog box, with the server specified in the
field to the left of the Select button.
9 Click OK. A status dialog box opens, reflecting the setup progress.
10 When the setup is complete, a confirmation dialog box opens. Click OK.
11 Log out of Call Logging, then log back on using the new MobileHEAT data source. Follow the
procedure for transferring Call Records to the new data source.
User Guide 215

MobileHEAT
Transfer Call Records to New Mobile Data Source

After setting up the mobile database, you need to transfer the records from the host to your
MobileHEAT data source, using the MobileHEAT ‐ Transfer Calls function. Note that you will also use
this function to synchronize the mobile data source with the host after working off‐line.
To Transfer Call Records from the Host to the Mobile Data Source:
1 Log on to Call Logging, selecting MobileHEATSQL as your data source. You must be logged on
to the mobile data source before you can transfer calls.
2 Select Accessory>MobileHEAT ‐ Transfer Calls. The MobileHEAT Call Transfers dialog box
opens.
3 Select the Get Call Group check box (or click Groups). The Open Group dialog box opens,
displaying a list of all of your Call Groups.
Note: The two options beneath the Get Call Group option are available only if a
change was made to the Config or Profile tables in the host database.
216 HEAT
4 Select the group you would like to transfer from the host system, then click Open. This returns
you to the MobileHEAT Call Transfers dialog box, with the name of the selected Call Group in
the Get Call Group field.
5 To download the host's group table along with the specified Call Group, click the Get Host
Group table check box. This selection overwrites any local groups you may have set up on your
mobile system.
6 If you are downloading over a slow connection, you can commit the data periodically at a
specified time frame (for example, every 60 seconds) using the Commit database after each
field. That way, if there is a network disconnect during transfer, you can resume the transfer
with all prior data downloaded.
7 Click the Transfer button. When the transfer is complete, the MobileHEAT Transfer Statistics
dialog box displays.
User Guide 217

MobileHEAT
8 Click OK.
Synchronizing Call Records

After working off‐line in your mobile data source, you can synchronize your mobile source with the host
using the MobileHEAT ‐ Transfer Calls option. The transfer of data to the host includes updates to the
mobile data source CallLog table and any related Subset, Journal, Assignment, and Detail tables.
The transfer option also enables you to transfer Call Groups from the host data source to the mobile
source, synchronizing the two systems, meaning that any validation or system tables that have changed
are also downloaded along with the selected Call Group. If a new Edit Set was committed on the host,
then all of the tables need to be downloaded in order to synchronize the systems. A warning message
displays, since downloading all of the changes could take a long time, depending on the size of your
database.
Note: For case‐sensitive databases, such as Oracle, duplicate records are not
imported. Only the first record within the file is imported (for example,
DATabASE and database may be different records, but only one is imported).
When you synchronize your MobileHEAT database with the host HEAT database via the MobileHEAT ‐
Transfer Calls option:
• The host copies new and updated Customer Records to MobileHEAT.
• MobileHEAT transfers new and updated Call Records to the host. A Transfer Log entry is created
for each Call Record transferred to the host.
• You can copy additional Call Records from the host to MobileHEAT.
• You can copy the current Call Group table from the host to MobileHEAT.
Synchronizing the Mobile Data Source with the Host:
1 Log on to Call Logging, selecting MobileHEAT as your data source. You must be logged on to
the mobile data source before you can transfer calls.
2 Select Accessory>MobileHEAT ‐ Transfer Calls. The MobileHEAT Call Transfers dialog box
opens.
3 To download calls from the host during this synchronization, select the Get Call Group check
box (or click Groups), then select the group.
4 To download the host's group table along with the specified Call Group, click the Get Host
Group table check box. This selection overwrites any local groups you may have set up on your
mobile system.
218 HEAT
Synchronizing Call Records
5 If you are downloading over a slow connection, you can commit the data periodically at a
specified time frame (for example, every 60 seconds) using the Commit database after each
field. That way, if there is a network disconnect during transfer, you can resume the transfer
with all prior data downloaded.
6 Click the Transfer button to transfer all calls. This synchronizes your mobile database with the
host, transferring new and modified Call Records from the mobile database to the host. If the
Host Profile table or Configuration table have new or updated records, either the Config table
has changed check box or the Profile table has changed check box is selected; HEAT always
updates the Configuration and Profile tables in the mobile database to match those on the
host system. When the Call Records from the mobile database are synchronized with the host,
the temporary Call ID (beginning with 9) is replaced with a permanent Call ID, in sequence with
host Call Records. Any new Call Records or modified Call Records are automatically uploaded
to the host first. After that transfer is complete, your requested group download occurs.
7 When the transfer is complete, the MobileHEAT Transfer Statistics dialog box displays,
specifying the number of records uploaded and downloaded.
8 Click OK.
User Guide 219

MobileHEAT
220 HEAT
A
Resources
Additional Documentation
In addition to this guide, the following resources are available to provide you with information about
HEAT:
• Online Help ‐ Accessed by clicking the Help menu option in Call Logging or Administrator
module, and the Help icon in Web User Interface, online help provides topic overviews and
step‐by‐step instructions to walk you through basic tasks, in addition to a comprehensive table
of contents, index, and search function.
• HEAT Installation Guide ‐ Provides the information needed to install HEAT, including system
requirements and instructions for unattended installations.
• HEAT Administrator Guide ‐ Provides administrators with the information necessary to
configure HEAT settings and defaults, HEAT Messaging Center (HMC), HEAT Survey, and HEAT
Self Service configurations..
Note: Guides are available in PDF format from the Installation CD‐ROM or from
http://www.frontrange.com/Support/ for maintenance customers.
• HEAT Plus Knowledge Installation Guide ‐ Provides the information needed to install HPK,
including system requirements, installation wizard procedure, and the HPK database schema.
• Training Courses ‐ Information regarding training courses for the FrontRange Solutions family of
products can be found at:
http://frontrange.learn.com
Resources
Contact Us
Support Site
FrontRange Solutions can answer your technical support questions about HEAT, FRS Foundation,
GoldMine, and other FrontRange product families. Visit:
http://www.frontrange.com/Support/
Contact Information
FrontRange Solutions Worldwide Headquarters
5675 Gibraltar Drive
Pleasanton, CA 94588 USA
TEL: 800.776.7889 and +1 925.398.1800
If calling from Canada, dial: 1.888.603.3270
Offices are also located in Latin America, Asia Pacific, Europe, and South Africa. For international
contact information, go to the FrontRange Solutions Web site, click the Contact link at the top of
the page, then click the Offices tab.
222 HEAT
Index
Symbols attachments
add, 84, 85
@functions, 154 attachment buttons, 22
call record, 83
A
customer, 83
acknowledge assignment, 46 edit, 85, 86
activity log global, 83
add record, 52 remove, 85, 86
delete record, 52 autoclose HEATBoard issue, 100
edit record, 52 autotask actions
print, 53 create, 117, 122
add attachments, 84, 85 defined, 117
add autotasks, 112 autotask folder
add call group, 56 create, 115
add configuration record, 72 delete, 115
add contact record, 71 AutoTask tab, 106
add customer group, 76 autotasks, 111
add customer profile, 68 @functions, 154
add record to activity log, 52 add, 112
add report shortcut, 192 create, 112
alarms, 40 create toolbar button, 115
asset configuration, 188 delete, 114
delete assets, 190 edit, 114
transfer assets, 190 edit blocks, 162
transfer assets into call records, 189 export, 117
assets field icons, 120
create call records, 189 import, 116
assignment form, 44 insert all assignments, 162
assignments insert all journals, 162
acknowledge, 46 insert blank value, 162
create, 46 insert counter, 162
delete, 48 insert field, 153
resolve, 46 insert filename, 161
view, 47 insert functions, 154
Index
insert HEAT values, 153 call record forms, 33
insert new line, 162 call records, 33
insert temporary filename, 162 alarms, 40
run, 114 attachments, 83
close, 37
B create, 34
Boolean search, 91 delete, 38
@functions, 92 lock, 39
logical operators, 91 open, 34
broadcast messages, 205 print, 208
put on hold, 40
C reopen, 37
save, 36
Call Browse tab, 105 track, 51
Call Group tab, 108 unlock, 39
call groups, 55 update, 38
@functions, 154 call status banner, 19
add, 56 call transfer log
create, 56 view, 53
create toolbar button, 62 change password
delete, 60 user preferences display tab, 166
edit, 60 close call record, 37
insert functions, 154 close HEATBoard issue, 100
open, 59 configuration record
refresh, 61 add, 72
remove calls, 61 create, 72
tabbed layout, 20 contact record
call log form, 42 add, 71
call logging create, 71
attachments toolbar buttons, 22 create assignment, 46
call record control buttons, 21 create autotask actions, 117, 122
call record tabs, 21 create autotask folder, 115
call status banner, 19 create autotasks, 112
customize, 163 create call group, 56
InfoCenter, 20 Boolean expression, 57
menu descriptions, 10 simple search, 56
status bar buttons, 23 create call record, 34
table maintenance, 183 create call record alarm, 40
toolbar, 18 create configuration record, 72
user preferences, 164 create contact record, 71
call logging process, 29 create customer group, 76
Call Map, 102 Boolean expression, 77
call map simple search, 76
user preferences, 178 create customer profile, 68
call record create HEATBoard issue, 99
abandon changes, 36 create journal entry, 49
stopwatch, 36
224
Index
create report shortcut, 192 E
create toolbars, 180
customer attachments, 83 edit activity log record, 52
Customer Group tab, 107 edit attachments, 85, 86
customer groups, 75 edit autotasks, 114
@functions, 154 edit call group, 60
add, 76 edit customer group, 80
create, 76 edit customer profile, 70
create toolbar button, 81 edit HEATBoard issue, 100
delete, 80 edit journal entry, 50
edit, 80 edit report shortcut, 197
insert functions, 154 export autotask, 117
open, 79
F
customer profile
add, 68 Favorites, 103
create, 68 field icons, 120
delete, 70 find customer profile, 68
edit, 70 find profile record, 68
find, 68 First Level Support (FLS), 94
customer records, 67 user preference settings, 174
call history form, 73 forms
configuration form, 71 assignment, 44
contacts form, 71 call history, 73
profile form, 68 call log, 42
customize toolbars, 180 call record, 33
configuration, 71
D contacts, 71
dashboard, 9 detail, 43
delete assignment, 48 journal, 48
delete autotask folder, 115 profile, 68
delete autotasks, 114 subset, 41
delete call group, 60
G
delete call record, 38
delete customer groups, 80 global attachments, 83
delete customer profile, 70 go to call ID, 90
delete journal entry, 51
delete record from activity log, 52 H
delete report shortcut, 197 HEAT Plus Knowledge (HPK), 93
designate lead call, 101 user preference settings, 174
detail form, 43 HEAT terminology, 26
display HEATBoard, 97
tabbed layout, 20 icons, 99
lead call, 101
toolbar buttons, 98
user preferences, 176
225
Index
HEATBoard groups First Level Support (FLS), 94
open, 101 HEAT Plus Knowledge (HPK), 93
HEATBoard issues
autoclose, 100 L
close, 100 link calls to HEATBoard issue, 101
create, 99 lock call record, 39
edit, 100 log in, 4
link calls, 101 upgrade notification, 4
I logical operators, 91
import autotask, 116 M
InfoCenter, 95 math functions, 154
AutoTasks, 106 math operators, 154
Call Browse, 105 MobileHEAT, 211
Call Groups, 108 set up database, 213
Call Map, 102 transfer call records, 216
Customer Groups, 107 synchronize call records, 218
display options, 97
Favorites, 103 N
HEATBoard, 97
navigate, 96 navigation, 8
security and rights, 96
O
insert all assignments, 162
insert all journals, 162 open call group, 59
insert blank value, 162 open call record, 34
insert counter, 162 open customer group, 79
insert field, 153 open HEATBoard group, 101
insert filename, 161 operators, 154
insert functions, 154
insert HEAT values, 153 P
insert new line, 162 print call records
insert temporary filename, 162 by call group, 209
J in form view, 208
in grid view, 209
journal entries print preview, 208
create, 49 profile
delete, 51 find, 68
edit, 50
view, 50 Q
journal form, 48 quick search, 88
K R
keyboard refresh call group, 61
shortcut keys, 4 remove attachments, 85, 86
knowledge bases reopen call record, 37
226
Index
report shortcuts, 191 T
add, 192
create, 192 tabbed layout, 20
create toolbar button, 199 table maintenance, 183
delete, 197 add values, 184
edit, 197 asset configuration, 188
run, 196 create call records for assets, 189
set default, 198 delete assets, 190
reports delete values, 184
Crystal reports, 199 edit values, 184
resolve assignment, 46 smart prompts, 186
run autotask, 114 transfer assets, 190
run report shortcut, 196 transfer assets into call records, 189
themes, 182
S toolbar
supportmail, 202
search toolbars
Boolean search, 91 create, 180
browse, 90 customize, 180
find command, 89 track call records
go to call ID, 90 activity log, 51
quick search, 88
simple search, 88 U
search Internet, 93
search methods, 87 unlock call record, 39
send broadcast message, 205 update call record, 38
set theme, 182 upgrade notification, 4
set up MobileHEAT database, 213 user preferences, 164
shortcut keys, 4 assignments, 167
simple search, 88 call map, 178
smart prompts, 186 default data source, 173
status bar buttons, 23 display, 166
stopwatch general tab, 164
edit, 36 grid settings, 167
subset form, 41 GroupWise, 171
supportmail HEATBoard, 176
create folders, 203 Internet search, 164
create groups, 203 journals, 167
navigation, 202 location, 173
send email, 204 MAPI/Lotus, 170
set up, 202 paths, 174
toolbar, 202 POP/SMTP, 172
prompts, 175
sounds, 175
supportmail, 169
tabbed layout, 20, 166
time zone, 173
227
Index
V
view assignment, 47
view call transfer log, 53
view journal entry, 50
W
Web tab
Favorites, 103
search Internet, 93
Web browse autotask action, 150
228

HEAT User Guide

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

HEAT User Guide

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

HEAT User Guide

Copyright  2010 FrontRange Solutions USA Inc. All Rights Reserved.

User Guide vii

Launch and Log On to Call Logging

First Level Support (FLS)

Navigate Call Logging

Call Logging Main Window

Call Status Banner

Call Record Tab Bar

Call Record Controls

Key Terms and Concepts

Visualizing the Call Logging Flow

Call Logging Process

How Call Logging Works with Other Modules

Working with Call Records

Open Call Records

Create New Call Records

Save Call Records

Abandon Changes to Call Records

Close Call Records

Reopen Call Records

Update Call Records

Delete Call Records

Lock and Unlock Call Records

View Locked Call Records

Put Call Records On Hold

On Hold Call Group

Working with a Subset

Working with the Call Log Form

Call Log Form Fields

Working with the Detail Form

Enter Detail Form Data

Edit Detail Forms

Working with the Assignment Form

Assignment Form Fields

Create a New Assignment

Working with the Journal Form

Journal Form Fields

Create Journal Entries

Edit Journal Entries

View Journal Entries

Abandon Journal Entries

Delete Journal Entries

Track Call Records

Working with the Activity Log

Add Records to the Activity Log

Delete Records from the Activity Log

Edit Records in the Activity Log

Print the Activity Log

Call Transfer Logs

Create Call Groups

Working with Call Groups

Open Call Groups

Edit Call Groups

Delete Call Groups

Restore Saved Call Groups

Save Call Group after Running

Refresh Call Groups

Remove Calls from Call Groups

Create Toolbar Buttons for Call Groups

Working with My Hot List

Working with Hot Lists

Create Hot Lists